Physics Past Paper - P2 - 2004-14 PDF

Centre Number Candidate Number Name
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

General Certificate of Education Ordinary Level
PHYSICS 5054/02
Paper 2 Theory
May/June 2004
1 hour 45 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: answer paper
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Section A
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
Section B
Answer any two questions.
Write your answers on the separate answer paper provided.
At the end of the examination, fasten the separate answer paper securely to the Question Paper.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
For Examiner’s Use
Section A
If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or Q9
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page. Q10
Stick your personal label here, if Q11

provided.
Total
This document consists of 12 printed pages.

SPA (NH/CG) S60719/3
© UCLES 2004 [Turn over
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section A
Answer all the questions in this section.
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a free-fall parachutist falling vertically downwards. Fig. 1.2 shows how the
speed of the parachutist varies with time.
speed
downwards B
A
0
0 time
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(a) (i) State the name of the downward force acting on the parachutist.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the name of one upward force acting on the parachutist.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) State the initial value of the acceleration of the parachutist. Give the unit of your
answer.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why the acceleration decreases from A to B.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) Explain why the parachutist falls at a constant speed after B.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Heat is transferred by conduction, convection and radiation.
(a) (i) State which of the three methods is responsible for the transfer of heat from the
Sun to the Earth.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why the other two methods cannot be involved in this transfer.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A hand feels hot when placed above a lighted match, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
Explain in detail how convection causes this to happen.
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
Fig. 2.1 [2]
(c) Fig. 2.2 shows a layer of fibreglass placed between the ceiling of a room and the roof of
a house.
roof
ceiling
fibreglass
Fig. 2.2
Explain how the layer of fibreglass helps to keep the room warm when it is cold outside.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04 [Turn over

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Thermal expansion can be a problem.
gap in
bridge
Fig. 3.1
Small gaps are left in railway lines and in bridges, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
(a) Explain in detail why the gaps are needed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) State one other problem caused by thermal expansion and explain how it can be solved.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a student clapping in front of a vertical wall. The wall reflects the sound.
student makes
regular claps
distance to wall 80 m
Fig. 4.1
The student changes the number of claps made in 1 minute until the reflection of each clap
returns to her at exactly the same time as she makes the next clap.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s.
(a) Explain what is meant by speed.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the time between claps.
time = …………………….. [3]
(c) Calculate the number of claps in 1 minute.
number of claps = ……………….. [2]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a piece of recording tape passing under the recording head of a tape
recorder. An alternating current is passed through the coil. The tape is coated with a
magnetic material that becomes magnetised.
coil
recording head
tape
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Explain why the tape becomes magnetized.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Fig. 5.1 shows that sections of the tape are magnetised in opposite directions.
Explain why they become magnetised in opposite directions.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The tape is moved faster past the recording head. State how this changes the
pattern on the tape.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) Explain why the coating on the tape must be of a permanent magnetic material.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the name of a permanent magnetic material.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a circuit in which a voltmeter is placed across a resistor.
18 Ω
power
supply
12 Ω V
Fig. 6.1
The potential difference across the 12 Ω resistor is 4.0 V.
The voltmeter has three different ranges: 0 to 3.0 V, 0 to 6.0 V and 0 to 30 V. The best range
for use in this circuit is 0 to 6.0 V.
(a) Explain why
(i) using the voltmeter on the range 0 to 3.0 V is unsuitable,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) using the voltmeter on the range 0 to 30 V is unsuitable.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) Calculate the current in the 12 Ω resistor. State the formula that you use.
current = …………………
(ii) Calculate the p.d. between A and B in Fig. 6.1.
p.d. = ………………….
[5]
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a simple version of an electron-beam tube.
anode deflecting
plates
filament
6V fluorescent
screen
vacuum
2000 V
Fig. 7.1
The filament is connected to a 6 V power supply and there is a potential difference of 2000 V
between the filament and the anode. As the electron beam hits the fluorescent screen, a
spot of light appears on the screen.
(a) Explain why
(i) electrons are emitted from the filament,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) electrons accelerate after they leave the filament,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) a vacuum is needed in the tube.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) An alternating potential difference of very low frequency is applied across the deflecting
plates in Fig. 7.1. The spot of light on the screen is seen to move. Describe and explain
the movement of the spot.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 The pie chart in Fig. 8.1 shows the relative contributions made by different sources to
background radiation.
power stations and weapons testing

food
cosmic rays
radon gas
medical
rocks
Fig. 8.1
(a) Which source makes the greatest contribution to the background radiation?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State one effect of background radiation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Where do cosmic rays come from?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The nucleon number (mass number) of 220

86 Rn is 220.
Define nucleon number.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Radon (286

20 Rn) decays by the emission of an alpha-particle.
State the proton number (atomic number) and the nucleon number (mass number) of
the nucleus left after an alpha-particle is emitted from this nucleus.
proton number ……………………..
nucleon number ….………………….

[2]

10
Section B
Answer two questions from this section.
Use the separate answer paper provided.
9 Fig. 9.1 shows the main parts of an electric grill. An electric current in the heating element causes
it to become red hot and to emit visible light and infra-red radiation. The infra-red radiation is used
to cook food.
heating
element
outer
metal
case shiny
material
food
Fig. 9.1
(a) Infra-red radiation has a longer wavelength than visible light. Both are parts of the
electromagnetic spectrum.
(i) Draw a diagram of the electromagnetic spectrum that shows visible light, infra-red and
three other parts of the spectrum. Your diagram should put the parts of the spectrum in
order of increasing wavelength.
(ii) Explain why the grill has a layer of shiny material between the heating element and the
outer case.
[7]
(b) For safety, the electric grill is fitted with an earth wire. State where the earth wire is connected
to the electric grill and explain how it acts as a safety device. [4]
(c) The current in the heating element is 8.3 A when it is connected to the 230 V mains supply.
(i) State the equation that links current, power and voltage.
(ii) Calculate the power rating of the heating element when it is working correctly. Give your
answer to an appropriate number of significant figures.
(iii) A student thinks that if the heating element is connected to a mains supply of 115 V then
the power produced is halved. Explain why the student is wrong.
[4]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

11
10 Fig. 10.1 is a full-scale drawing of a small aluminium bar.
Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe how the density of aluminium may be determined using the bar. In your account
(i) describe the readings to be taken,

(ii) state the instruments used to make the readings,
(iii) describe how the density is calculated from the readings.
[6]
(b) The bar is placed in a small furnace.

Fig. 10.2 shows how the temperature of the bar varies with time t.
700
temperature
/ °C 600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200
t/s
Fig. 10.2
(i) State what happens to the bar between t = 600 s and 1000 s.
(ii) Explain what effect the energy supplied to the bar has on its molecules between t = 0
and 1000 s.
(iii) The mass of the bar is 0.030 kg and the specific heat capacity of aluminium is
880 J/(kg °C). Calculate the energy supplied to the bar between t = 0 and 600 s.
(iv) Between t = 600 s and 1000 s the furnace supplies 30 joules of energy per second to the
bar. Calculate the specific latent heat of fusion of aluminium.
[9]
12
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a children’s ride. A carriage containing children is pulled up the slope by a motor. The
carriage stops at A and then runs down through B, C and D without further input of energy. Between
D and E the carriage turns through a bend at constant speed, as shown in Fig. 11.2. At E, brakes are
applied and the carriage slows to a stop at F. The height of the ride is 30 m at A and 10 m at C.
30 m
C
B
10 m
F
D E
Fig. 11.1
The mass of the carriage and children is 500 kg.

Take the gravitational field strength as 10 N/kg.
(a) (i) Discuss the energy changes that occur in the ride from A to D.
(ii) Calculate the maximum potential energy of the carriage and children.
(iii) Assuming that there is no friction between A and C, determine the kinetic energy of the
carriage and children at C. Show your working.
[9]
(b) carriage
D viewed from
above
E
Fig. 11.2
Between D and E, the carriage goes round part of a horizontal circle at constant speed.
During this time the velocity of the carriage changes.
(i) Explain how the carriage can have a constant speed but a changing velocity.
(ii) State the direction of the force that acts on the carriage to make it move round the curve.
[3]
(c) Between E and F, a frictional force of 3000 N acts to slow the carriage. Calculate the
deceleration of the carriage. [3]
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly
infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

PHYSICS 5054/02
Paper 2 Theory
May/June 2005
1 hour 45 minutes
Additional Materials: Answer Paper
Section A
Section B

Section A
Q9
details. If any details are incorrect or

provided.
Total

SPA (MML 8112 3/04) S80716/3
2 For
Examiner's
Use
Section A
1 Fig. 1.1 represents the motion of Earth and the planet Venus around the Sun. The orbits shown
are circles.
not to
scale
Sun
orbit of Venus
orbit of Earth
Earth
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force exerted by the Sun on the
Earth. [1]
(b) Information about Earth and Venus is given in the table.
planet time for one orbit radius of orbit circumference of

in (Earth) years / million km orbit / million km
Venus 0.7 108 679
Earth 1.0 150 942
(i) Use the information in the table to show that Venus has a greater speed than Earth.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) As Earth and Venus move in their orbits, the distance between them changes.
Calculate the largest possible distance between them.
distance = ...................................... million km [1]

© UCLES 2005 5054/02/M/J/05
3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 shows the lens of a simple camera being used to photograph an object.
lens
object film
camera
Fig. 2.1
The lens forms a focused image of the object on the film.
(a) Draw two rays from the top of the object to show how the lens forms the image. [2]
(b) The object moves closer to the camera. State how the lens is adjusted to keep the
image in focus.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Complete Fig. 2.2 to show how white light is split into a spectrum when it passes
through a glass prism. [3]
prism
white light
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/M/J/05 [Turn over

4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a weather balloon. The balloon is shown partly filled with gas from a cylinder.
cylinder balloon
Fig. 3.1
The balloon contains no gas initially. When it is connected to the cylinder, gas enters the
balloon. The pressure in the cylinder decreases.
(a) Explain why the molecules inside the cylinder

(i) exert a large pressure initially,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) exert a smaller pressure in the cylinder when the balloon is filled.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The volume of the cylinder is 0.0020 m3. The pressure inside the cylinder is initially
200 atmospheres. When the cylinder is connected to the balloon, the final pressure in
the cylinder and the balloon is 1.0 atmosphere.
The temperature of the gas remains constant.
Calculate the final volume of gas in the balloon. State the equation that you use.
volume = ............................. [3]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/M/J/05

5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a hydroelectric power station. Water from the lake is used to produce
electricity in the turbine house.
dam
lake
turbine
house
to river
Fig. 4.1
(a) State where the water in Fig. 4.1 has the least potential energy.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) In 30 minutes, the water loses 5.0 × 109 J of energy and 4.5 × 109 J of electrical energy
is produced in the turbine house.
(i) Calculate the efficiency of the energy conversion.
efficiency = .......................... [1]

(ii) Calculate, in watts, the electrical power output from the turbine house.
power = ........................... W [3]
(c) Some power stations burn coal to produce the same electrical power output. State one
advantage of the hydroelectric power station.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) State one harmful effect that the hydroelectric power station may have on the
environment.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a coil of wire wrapped around a plastic tube. Inside the tube are two pieces of
soft iron. When the switch is closed, the compass needles point in the direction of the
magnetic field produced at each position. You may ignore the magnetic field of the Earth in
this question.
B
plastic tube
compass
A C
soft iron
switch
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1 mark arrows, in compasses A, B and C, to show the direction of the
magnetic field at each position after the switch has been closed. [2]
(b) When the switch is closed, the two pieces of soft iron in the tube become magnets and
move.
(i) On Fig. 5.1, mark the poles formed on each piece of soft iron. [1]
(ii) State and explain how the pieces of iron move.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) State the effect on the magnetic field of

(i) reversing the direction of the current,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) reducing the size of the current.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/M/J/05

7 For
Examiner's
Use
6 The table gives information about two household appliances.
appliance mains current power power time used energy used

supply through /W / kW per day per day
voltage appliance /h / kW h
/V /A
television 240 1.20 288 0.288 2.50 0.720
water
240 12.6 0.50
heater
(a) Write the missing values in the empty spaces in the table. [3]
(b) Why is more power needed for the water heater than for the television?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The water heater is connected to the mains supply. Explain why using a 3 A fuse would
not be suitable.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an electrical circuit.
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow at A to show the direction of flow of the electrons in the wire.
[1]
(b) What is the name of component X?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State and explain how the potential difference across X varies as the light shining on it
becomes brighter.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/M/J/05

9 For
Examiner's
Use
8 Three cells are connected in series making a battery, as shown in Fig. 8.1. The e.m.f. of
each cell is 1.5 V. A resistance of 15 is connected to the battery.
15
Fig. 8.1
(a) What is the total e.m.f. of the battery?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the current in the circuit.
State the equation that you use.
current = ............................. [3]
(c) A battery can be made from cells connected in parallel, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
Fig. 8.2
State one advantage of connecting the cells in parallel.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
10
Section B
9 A train travels from one station to the next. It starts from rest at time t = 0 and accelerates
uniformly for the first 20 s. At t = 20 s it reaches its top speed of 25 m/s. It then travels at this speed
for a further 30 s before decelerating uniformly to rest. The total time for the journey is 60 s.
(a) (i) Sketch a speed-time graph for the motion of the train. Do not use graph paper. Put the
speed of the train on the y-axis and time along the x-axis. [3]
(ii) Write down the equation, in words, that relates acceleration, time and change in
velocity. [1]
(iii) Explain what is meant by a uniform acceleration. [1]
(iv) Use your graph to calculate the deceleration of the train as it comes to rest. [2]
(b) Several forces act on the train when it is moving.

(i) Name the horizontal and vertical forces that act on the train and give the direction of
each force. [4]
(ii) Explain whether the horizontal forces are balanced or unbalanced,
1. when the train accelerates,
2. when the train travels at constant speed,
3. when the train decelerates.
You may draw diagrams to help your explanations. [3]
(c) A second train has a non-uniform acceleration. Sketch a speed-time graph showing a
non-uniform acceleration. Do not use graph paper. [1]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/M/J/05

11
10 When a house is heated, energy is lost to the outside.
Fig. 10.1 shows where the energy is lost from the house.
roof
windows 10%
walls 35%
escape of hot air

15%
floors 15%
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) Calculate the percentage of the energy lost through the roof. [1]
(ii) Energy is lost through the roof by conduction and from the roof by convection and by
radiation. Explain in detail how this happens. [6]
(iii) Fitting carpets on the floor reduces energy loss. Explain how a carpet reduces energy
loss. [2]
(b) The table gives information about three methods of reducing energy loss.
method of reducing installation saving on number of years of

energy loss cost energy costs saving needed to cover
in one year installation costs
A fitting carpets on the floor $600 $10 60
B insulating the roof $300 Y 3
C fitting modern windows X $20 40
(i) Calculate the values of X and Y. [2]

(ii) Which one of these three methods should the house owner choose? Explain your
answer. [2]
(iii) State two other ways, not already mentioned, of reducing energy loss from the house.
[2]

12
11 (a) Some atoms that undergo radioactive decay have a half-life of 6 hours. The count rate near a
sample of these atoms is initially 838 counts/minute. Background radiation near the sample is
18 counts/minute.
(i) Describe the structure of an atom. It may help to draw a diagram. [3]
(ii) Explain what is meant by radioactive decay. State clearly which part of the atom decays.
[3]
(iii) State what is meant by background radiation. [1]
(iv) The equipment is left undisturbed for 12 hours. Calculate the count rate due to the
sample of atoms alone after this time. [2]
(b) The table shows a radioactive series. Atom A emits a beta-particle and becomes atom B.
Atom B then emits a particle to become atom C.
proton number nucleon number radiation emitted

atom
(atomic number) (mass number)
A 83 214 beta-particle
B X 214 Y
C 82 210 none
(i) Calculate the proton number X of atom B and explain how you calculated it. [2]
(ii) State the name of radiation Y and describe the changes that occur in the atom when this
radiation is emitted. [3]
(iii) Using information from the table, explain why atoms A and C are not isotopes of the
same element. [1]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/M/J/05


PHYSICS 5054/02
Paper 2 Theory
May/June 2006
1 hour 45 minutes
Additional Materials: Answer Booklet/Paper.
Section A
Section B

Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total

MML 10759 3/05 T01296/2
2 For
Examiner's
Use
Section A
1 A student carries out an experiment to measure the power he produces. He runs up a flight
of stairs, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
The student takes readings to calculate his power.
(a) (i) List all of the readings he must take.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) State one precaution he should take to make sure one of his readings is accurate.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Write down all of the equations he must use to calculate his power from the readings.
You may use symbols or words in your equations.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/M/J/06
3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 A cyclist starts from rest. He accelerates and then travels at a constant speed. At 12 s, the
cyclist applies the brakes and slows down. Photographs are taken of the cyclist at 4 s
intervals. Fig. 2.1 shows the results.
distance / m
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0s 4s 8s 12 s
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw a possible position of the front wheel of the cycle at 16 s. [1]
(b) On Fig. 2.2, plot a distance-time graph of the cyclist for the first 16 s. [4]
60
50
40
distance / m
30
20
10
0
0 4 8 12 16
time / s
Fig. 2.2
(c) Calculate the average speed of the cyclist during the first 12 s.
average speed = ................................... [2]

4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the construction of a simple a.c. generator. When the coil is rotated an e.m.f.
is induced in the coil.
axis
coil
N S
slip ring
output
Fig. 3.1
(a) Explain why an e.m.f. is induced.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State the purpose of the slip rings.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The direction of the current in the coil can be found from Lenz’s law.
State Lenz’s law.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The induced e.m.f. can be increased by rotating the coil faster. State one other way in
which the e.m.f. can be increased.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/M/J/06
5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 and Fig. 4.2 show rays of light passing through the same semi-circular block of
plastic.
63°
Q 27° Q
44° 50°
46°
40°
Fig. 4.1 Fig. 4.2
Q is the centre of the straight side of the block.
(a) State the value of the critical angle in the plastic.
critical angle = ........................................... [1]
(b) Explain what is meant by the critical angle.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Calculate the refractive index of the plastic. State the formula that you use.
refractive index = ................................... [3]
(d) Some light reflects back into the plastic at Q.
On Fig. 4.1, draw the reflected ray at Q. [1]

6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 Two conducting spheres are rubbed and become charged, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
+ –
–
+ + –
+ –
+ + – –
+ –
Fig. 5.1
(a) The spheres are uncharged before they are rubbed.
Explain, in terms of the movement of electrons, how they become charged.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 5.1, draw the electric field pattern between the spheres. Show the direction of
the field lines. [2]
(c) A metal wire is used to connect the two spheres together. In a time of 2.0 × 10–3 s, a
charge of 1.8 × 10–13 C passes through the wire.
Calculate the current in the wire.
current = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/M/J/06

7 For
Examiner's
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a mains extension lead. The six sockets allow several electrical appliances
to be connected to the mains supply through one cable.
mains supply
cable
sockets
Fig. 6.1
(a) The cable connects the sockets to the mains supply.
The cable contains three wires: live, neutral and earth. State what is meant by
(i) live,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) neutral,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) earth.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Six powerful lamps are plugged into the sockets and switched on, one by one.
(i) State what happens in the cable as the lamps are switched on, one by one.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Describe why it can be dangerous when a fuse of the wrong value is used in the plug.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) Explain why your hands should be dry when you put a plug into a socket.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an electrical circuit and a cathode-ray oscilloscope (C.R.O.).
C.R.O.
Y-input
Y-gain
time base
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw the connections you would make to enable the C.R.O. to measure
the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor. [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the trace on the screen before and after the connections are made.
trace after C.R.O. is

connected to resistor
one division
trace before C.R.O. is
connected to resistor
Fig. 7.2
The Y-gain control is set at 2 V for each division on the screen.

(i) State the value of the p.d. across the resistor.
p.d. = .............................................................. [2]

(ii) The Y-gain control is altered to 4 V for each division.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the new trace seen on the screen. [1]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/M/J/06

9 For
Examiner's
Use
8 A radioactive source undergoes radioactive decay.
(a) Explain what is meant by radioactive decay.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Gamma-rays from a radioactive source are used to treat some foods.
The gamma-rays kill bacteria in the food so that it stays fresh.
Some people are worried that food treated in this way becomes radioactive. A scientist
tests three food samples. She measures the count-rate of the food before and after
treatment with gamma-rays. The results are shown in the table below. The radioactive
source is not present during any test.
food count-rate before count-rate after

sample treatment / treatment /
counts per minute counts per minute
A 29 32
B 32 28
C 30 31
(i) Explain why there is a measured count-rate before the food is treated.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Determine and explain whether the treated food becomes radioactive.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

10
Section B
Use the separate answer sheets available from the Supervisor.
9 A student has an open tank for storing water outside her house. The tank is black and is in direct
sunlight.
She notices that the level of water inside the tank slowly decreases as water evaporates.
water
black metal water tank
concrete base
Fig. 9.1
She investigates whether some changes, shown in the table, will affect the amount of water
evaporated each day.
change 1 a heater is used to increase the temperature of the water
change 2 a sheet of plastic is used to cover half the surface of the water
change 3 a fan is used to blow air over the top of the tank
change 4 the outside of the tank is painted white
Only one change is made at a time. All other factors are kept constant.
(a) State whether each change will increase, leave unchanged or decrease the amount of water
evaporated each day. Explain each of your answers. [8]
(b) She notices that the water level in the tank falls by 0.005 m in 40 000 s.
The cross-sectional area of the tank is 3.0 m2. The density of water is 1000 kg/m3.
The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.2 × 106 J/kg.
Calculate
(i) the volume of water that evaporates, [1]
(ii) the mass of water that evaporates, [2]
(iii) the energy required to evaporate the water, [2]
(iv) the average rate at which energy is used to evaporate the water. [2]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/M/J/06

11
10 Fig.10.1 shows a section through a very old bicycle tyre that is made of solid rubber.
ground ground
Fig. 10.1 Fig. 10.2
(a) The solid rubber tyre exerts a pressure on the ground.
The unit of pressure is the pascal (Pa).

(i) Define the pascal. [2]
(ii) The mass of the bicycle and rider is 60 kg and the total area of the tyres in contact with
the road is 2.4 × 10–3 m2. The gravitational field strength is 10 N/kg.
Calculate the pressure exerted on the road. [3]
(iii) One of the solid rubber tyres goes over a small stone, as shown in Fig. 10.2. Describe
and explain how the pressure exerted on the ground changes. [2]
(b) Fig. 10.3 shows a modern tyre that contains air. A heavy person sits on the bicycle and the
shape of the tyre changes, as shown in Fig. 10.4.
Fig. 10.3 Fig. 10.4
The table contains information about the tyre in Fig. 10.3 and Fig. 10.4.
tyre in Fig. 10.3 tyre in Fig. 10.4
air pressure in tyre / Pa 1.9 × 105 2.1 × 105
volume of air / m3 0.016 V
(i) Calculate the volume V of the air in the tyre in Fig. 10.4. State one assumption that you
make in your calculation. [4]
(ii) Another way to change the pressure in the tyre is to raise the temperature.
State what happens to the pressure in the tyre when the temperature rises and explain
your answer using ideas about molecules. [4]
12
11 Fig.11.1 shows a wiring diagram for two different lamps A and B.
D C
240 V B
mains ~
supply
Fig. 11.1
(a) State the names of components C and D and explain the purpose, in this circuit, of each of
these components. [4]
(b) When both lamps are working correctly, the current in C is 0.42 A.
Lamp A is marked 240 V, 60 W. Calculate

(i) the current in lamp A, [2]
(ii) the current in lamp B, [2]
(iii) the resistance of lamp A. [3]
(c) The two lamps in Fig. 11.1 are connected in parallel. When wiring the circuit in a house, an
electrician makes a mistake and connects the two lamps in series to the mains supply. He
switches them on.
(i) Draw a circuit diagram showing the two lamps connected in series to the mains supply.
[1]
(ii) State whether the current in the two lamps is larger than, the same as, or smaller than
the currents you have calculated in (b). Explain your answer. [2]
(d) Another lamp is made using the same material for the filament as lamp A.
The filament in this new lamp has the same length as the filament in lamp A but has half the
cross-sectional area.
State the resistance of the new lamp. [1]
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/M/J/06

*5533380653*
PHYSICS 5054/02
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2007
1 hour 45 minutes
DO NOT WRITE ON ANY BARCODES.
Section A
Section B
Write your answers on the lined page provided, and, if necessary, continue on the separate answer paper
provided.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
SP MML/CGW 13214 4/06 T22982/2

2 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section A
1 Two athletes, A and B, run a 100 m race. At time t = 0, a gun is fired to start the race.
Fig. 1.1 shows the distance-time graph for the two athletes.
120
B
100
A
80
distance /m
60
40
A
20 B
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the motion of athlete A during the first 8 s of the race.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/M/J/07

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) State the distance between the two athletes as the winner passes the 100 m mark.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the speed of athlete A between t = 4 s and t = 15 s.
speed = ................................................ [2]

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A student investigates the evaporation of water. He pours 100 cm3 of water into measuring
cylinder A and 100 cm3 of water into measuring cylinder B. Measuring cylinder A is kept
at 40 °C and B is kept at 80 °C in the same part of the laboratory. Fig. 2.1 shows the two
measuring cylinders after 3 days.
cm3 cm3
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
A B
60 60
kept at kept at
50 50
40°C 40 40
80°C
30 30
20 20
10 10
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) Using ideas about molecules, explain why more water evaporates when the water
is kept at 80 °C.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Apart from an increase in temperature, state one change that causes water to
evaporate faster.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2300 J / g and the density of water is
1.0 g / cm3. During the three days, the water level in B drops from the 100 cm3 mark to
the level shown in Fig. 2.1. Calculate the energy used to evaporate water from B during
the three days.
energy = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/M/J/07

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a thermometer.
°C -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Fig. 3.1
(a) Explain how to calibrate a thermometer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i) State the range of the thermometer in Fig. 3.1.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State how you know that the scale of the thermometer in Fig. 3.1 is linear.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) Fig. 3.2 shows a thermometer which is more sensitive than the thermometer in Fig. 3.1.
Only 0 °C is marked on this new thermometer.
On Fig. 3.2, draw the temperature markings for 10 °C and 20 °C. [1]
°C 0
Fig. 3.2

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 shows part of an optical fibre.
glass
Fig. 4.1
The ray PQ undergoes total internal reflection in the optical fibre.
(a) On Fig. 4.1, continue the path of ray PQ until it reaches end R. [1]
(b) Explain what is meant by total internal reflection.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Optical fibres are cheaper and lighter than copper wires. State one other advantage of
using optical fibres rather than copper wires for telephone communications.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The light in the optical fibre is travelling at a speed of 2.1 × 108 m / s and has a wavelength
of 6.4 × 10–7 m.
Calculate the frequency of the light.
frequency = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/M/J/07

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 is drawn full scale. The focal length of the lens is 3.0 cm.
lens
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw two rays from the top of the object O that meet at the image. [2]
(b) (i) Define the term linear magnification.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Determine the magnification produced by the lens in Fig. 5.1.
magnification = ................................................ [1]
(c) Fig. 5.2 shows a normal eye viewing an object close to it. Fig. 5.3 is a long-sighted eye
viewing an object at the same distance.
normal long-sighted
eye eye
Fig. 5.2 Fig. 5.3
Complete Fig. 5.3 to show the rays travelling through the eye. [1]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a coil of wire wound on a cardboard tube.
There is a d.c. current in the coil. The direction of the current is shown in the key.
key
wire with
current into page
wire with
current out of
page
cardboard
tube
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the magnetic field produced by the coil. [3]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a simple loudspeaker that uses the coil shown in Fig. 6.1 attached to a
paper cone.
permanent paper
magnet coil cone
S N
Fig. 6.2
The coil is connected to a signal generator.
There is an alternating current of frequency 100 Hz in the coil.
(i) State what is meant by a frequency of 100 Hz.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/M/J/07

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Describe and explain the movement of the coil.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an electrical circuit containing a 12 V power supply and a number of resistors.
12 V
6Ω
3Ω
2Ω 4Ω
Fig. 7.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of
(i) the 2 Ω and 4 Ω resistors in series,
resistance = ................................................ [1]
(ii) the 3 Ω and 6 Ω resistors in parallel.
resistance = ................................................ [2]
(b) Calculate the reading of the ammeter in Fig. 7.1.
ammeter reading = ................................................ [2]
(c) Determine the potential difference across the 4 Ω resistor.
p.d. = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/M/J/07

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 (a) Explain how it is possible for an element to have different isotopes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State what is meant by the half-life of a radioactive isotope.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows how the number of atoms of a radioactive isotope changes with time.
5000
4000
number of
3000
atoms
2000
1000
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / s
Fig. 8.1
Determine the half-life of the radioactive isotope. On Fig. 8.1, show how you obtained
your result.
half-life = ................................................ [2]

12
Section B
Use the lined page provided and, if necessary,

continue on the separate sheets available from the Supervisor.
9 Fig. 9.1 shows the horizontal forces acting on a moving car.
force A force B
Fig. 9.1
(a) Compare the sizes and directions of the two forces when the car is
(i) moving along a straight road at constant speed, [1]
(ii) accelerating. [1]
(b) Suggest the direction of the resultant force on the car when the car turns a corner at constant
speed. [1]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows the speed-time graph for the first 24 s of the motion of the car along a straight
road.
20
18
16
speed 14
m/s
12
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
time /s
Fig. 9.2
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/M/J/07
13
(i) During the motion there is a period of uniform acceleration. State both the start and finish
times of this period. [1]
(ii) State the main energy changes that occur in the 24 s. [3]
(iii) Calculate the acceleration of the car during the first 5 s. State clearly the equation that
you use. [3]
(iv) Determine the distance travelled in the first 5 s. [3]
(d) The car is stopped by applying the brakes. Various factors can affect the distance travelled by
the car during the time that the brakes are applied. Apart from the force applied by the brakes,
state two of these factors. [2]

14
10 A farmer connects a house to the mains electricity. The house is a long way from the nearest 230 V
mains electricity supply.
Fig. 10.1 shows the mains supply connected to the house.
230 V
mains
supply
Fig. 10.1
(a) The farmer uses 230 V lamps in the house but they do not light up at full brightness. Explain
why the lamps are dim. [2]
(b) The farmer adds transformers, as shown in Fig. 10.2.
230 V
mains
supply transformer transformer
A B
Fig. 10.2
The lamps in the distant house light up at full brightness.
Explain why the lamps are now bright. [3]
(c) (i) Describe the structure of a transformer. You may draw a diagram to help your
explanation. [3]
(ii) Explain in detail how a transformer produces an output voltage. [3]
(d) The 230 V mains supply provides 690 W of power to transformer A in Fig. 10.2.
(i) Calculate the current supplied to the transformer. [2]
(ii) Calculate the energy supplied to the transformer in 10 minutes. Give your answer in
joules. [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/M/J/07

15
11 A plastic rod is rubbed with a cloth and becomes negatively charged.
(a) Explain how the rod becomes negatively charged when rubbed with a cloth. [2]
(b) An uncharged metal-coated sphere hangs from an insulating thread. The sphere is brought
near to the rod. The sphere is attracted to the rod, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
plastic rod
insulating thread
–
–
– metal-coated sphere
–
– point X
–
–
–
Fig. 11.1
(i) Describe and explain what happens to the free electrons in the metal-coated sphere as it
approaches the rod. [2]
(ii) Draw a diagram to show how charge is distributed on the sphere. [1]
(iii) Explain why the uncharged sphere is attracted to the negatively-charged rod. [2]
(c) With the charged rod still close, point X on the metal-coated sphere is earthed.
(i) State what is meant by earthing the sphere. [1]
(ii) Describe and explain what happens to the free electrons in the metal-coated sphere as it
is earthed. [2]
(iii) Draw a diagram to show how the charge is now distributed on the sphere. [1]
(d) Describe one device where electrostatic charging is used. In your answer include a diagram
and explain how and why the charge is produced. [4]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
Copyright Acknowledgements:
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/M/J/07

*6057998344*
PHYSICS 5054/02
1 hour 45 minutes
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Section A
Section B
Write your answers on the lined pages provided, and, if necessary, continue on the separate answer paper
provided.
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
SPA (FF/CG) T50280/4

2
Section A For
Examiner’s
Answer all the questions in this section. Use
1 Fig. 1.1 is a block diagram of a power station.
The four boxes represent different parts of the power station. The first box is labelled boiler.
electrical
energy
oil
output
boiler
Fig. 1.1
Each of the other three boxes should contain one of the labels from the following list.
generator, motor, transformer, turbine, solar panel
(a) On Fig. 1.1, label the boxes using words from the list. [2]
(b) State one environmental problem caused by burning oil to produce electricity.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Oil is a non-renewable energy source.
(i) State why oil is described as a non-renewable energy source.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State one renewable energy source.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/M/J/08

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a device for punching holes in a piece of paper. A person applies a force F at For
the end of the arm. Just before the hole is made in the paper, the arm is at rest. Examiner’s
Use
force F
1.0 cm 8.0 cm
arm
pivot steel rod

paper
metal base
Fig. 2.1
(a) Just before the hole is made, the force upwards on the steel rod is 7.2 N.
Calculate the value of F. Use the distances marked on Fig. 2.1.
F = ................................................ [2]
(b) The steel rod pushes the paper into the hole in the metal base with a force of 7.2 N.
The end of the steel rod has an area of 2.8 × 10 –5 m2.
Calculate the pressure exerted on the paper.

State the formula that you use in your calculation.
pressure = ................................................ [2]
(c) The force downwards on the paper due to the rod and the force upwards on the rod due
to the paper are related by Newton’s third law. State Newton’s third law.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

4
3 During a marathon race, the runner shown in Fig. 3.1 is very hot. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 3.1
At the end of the race, evaporation and convection cool the runner.
(a) (i) Explain how evaporation helps the runner to lose energy. Use ideas about
molecules in your answer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain why hot air rises around the runner at the end of the race.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) At the end of the race, the runner is given a shiny foil blanket, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
Wearing the blanket stops the runner from cooling too quickly.
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/M/J/08

5
Explain how the shiny foil blanket helps to reduce energy losses. For
Examiner’s
Use ideas about conduction, convection and radiation in your answer. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

6
4 Liquid air contains a mixture of oxygen and nitrogen. For

The boiling point of nitrogen is –196 °C and the boiling point of oxygen is –183 °C. Examiner’s
A sample of liquid air in a beaker is allowed to warm up slowly. Use
Fig. 4.1 shows how the reading of a thermometer in the beaker varies with time t.
-180
temperature
/ C
-190
-200
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
t / min
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe the two changes of state that occur and state when they occur.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The liquid air contains 200 g of liquid oxygen and 800 g of liquid nitrogen.
The specific heat capacity of liquid oxygen is 1.7 J / (g °C) and the specific heat capacity
of liquid nitrogen is 2.0 J / (g °C).
Calculate the thermal energy needed to warm the liquid from –205 °C to −196 °C.
State the formula that you use in your calculation.
energy = ................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/M/J/08

7
5 (a) Each object in the table below emits one main type of electromagnetic wave. For
Complete the table by writing in the name of the type of wave. Examiner’s
One line has been written for you. Use
Object Main type of electromagnetic wave emitted
radio transmitter radio wave
remote control for a television
radioactive source
[2]
(b) X-rays are used in hospitals to produce images of bones and to show whether bones
are broken.
(i) State what is used to detect X-rays.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain the properties of X-rays that enable an image of a bone to be produced.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

8
6 A filament lamp is labelled 240 V, 0.20 A. For

Examiner’s
(a) Calculate the resistance of the lamp at normal brightness. Use
resistance = ................................................ [2]
(b) The lamp is connected to a 240 V supply and switched on at time t = 0.
Fig. 6.1 shows the variation with t of the resistance of the lamp.
resistance
0
0 t
Fig. 6.1
Describe how the current in the lamp varies with t.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A second filament lamp has higher resistance.
State two differences between the two filaments that may cause the change in
resistance.
1 The filament in the second lamp is ..............................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2 The filament in the second lamp is ..............................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/M/J/08

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a straight wire between the poles of a magnet. The wire carries a current For
into the page. Examiner’s
Use
N S
wire carrying current into the page
Fig. 7.1
(i) State the direction of the magnetic field between the poles of the magnet.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force acting on the wire. [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows two wires.

Each wire carries a current into the page.
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw the magnetic field due to the currents in the wires. [3]
(ii) There is a force on each wire due to the current in the other wire.
On Fig. 7.2, draw an arrow on each wire to show these forces. [1]

10
8 Fig. 8.1 shows the part of a cathode-ray oscilloscope in which an electron beam is For
produced. Examiner’s
Use
filament anode
low
voltage electron
supply beam
vacuum
– +
high voltage supply
Fig. 8.1
(a) State why the filament emits electrons.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State
(i) how the electrons are made to move at high speed,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) why a vacuum is needed inside the oscilloscope.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) In each second, 8.0 × 1014 electrons pass through the hole in the anode.
The charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C. Calculate the current in the electron beam.
current = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/M/J/08

11
Section B
Use the lined pages provided and, if necessary,

9 When a car driver sees an emergency ahead, he applies the brakes. During his reaction time the
car travels at a steady speed and covers a distance known as the thinking distance. The braking
distance is the distance travelled by the car after the brakes are applied.
(a) State the energy change that occurs as the car brakes. [2]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows the speed-time graph of a car.

The driver sees the emergency at time t = 0.
The total mass of the car is 800 kg.
30
speed 25
m/s
20
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
t/s
Fig. 9.1
Determine
(i) the thinking distance, [1]
(ii) the braking distance, [2]
(iii) the deceleration of the car during braking, [2]
(iv) the force provided by the brakes. [2]
(c) Using ideas about friction and deceleration, state and explain how the braking distance is
affected by
(i) using new tyres rather than badly worn tyres, [2]
(ii) the car skidding on a wet road, [2]
(iii) the car carrying a heavy load of passengers. [2]

12
10 (a) Water waves are transverse waves. Sound is a longitudinal wave.
(i) Describe the difference between transverse waves and longitudinal waves. In your
account, draw a diagram of each type of wave. [4]
(ii) Sound contains regions of compression and regions of rarefaction. Describe what is
meant by a compression and by a rarefaction. [2]
(b) A ripple tank is used to demonstrate the reflection of water waves.
(i) Draw a labelled diagram of a ripple tank. [2]
(ii) Draw a diagram showing the reflection of waves from a plane barrier in a ripple tank. [2]
(c) Fig. 10.1 shows a water wave passing a floating log. The log is stationary.
log 6.0 m
A
water wave
Fig. 10.1
The log is 6.0 m long and 5 complete waves take 10 seconds to pass point A.
Determine
(i) the wavelength of the water waves, [1]
(ii) the frequency of the water waves, [2]
(iii) the speed of the water waves. [2]
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/M/J/08

13
11 (a) A scientist has three radioactive sources. The first source emits only alpha-particles, the
second source emits only beta-particles and the third source emits only gamma-rays.
(i) Explain how the scientist demonstrates that the three types of radiation have different
penetrating powers.
In your account
• draw a diagram of the apparatus used,
• state what materials are used to show the different penetrating powers,
• explain how the apparatus is used.
[5]
(ii) State two different safety precautions the scientist must follow when handling the
radioactive sources. [2]
(iii) Explain why the half-lives of the radioactive sources used in the demonstration should be
greater than 1 second. [2]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows radiation moving into the magnetic field between the poles of a strong
magnet.
radioactive
source radiation N
Fig. 11.1
The radioactive source emits alpha-particles, beta-particles and gamma-rays. For each type
of radiation, describe the path taken by the radiation.
You may draw a diagram to help your explanation. [3]
(c) Fig. 11.2 represents three different nuclei.
neutron
proton
nucleus nucleus nucleus

A B C
Fig. 11.2
State and explain which nuclei are from different isotopes of the same element. [3]

14
................................................................................................................................................. For
Examiner’s
................................................................................................................................................. Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/M/J/08

15
................................................................................................................................................. For
Examiner’s
................................................................................................................................................. Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/M/J/08

16
................................................................................................................................................. For
Examiner’s
................................................................................................................................................. Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/M/J/08

*0922348103*
PHYSICS 5054/02
1 hour 45 minutes
Additional Materials: Answer Booklet/Paper
Section A
Section B
Write your answers on the lined pages provided and, if necessary, continue on the separate answer paper
provided.
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
SPA (SJF5063/CG) T74829/5

2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A piece of paper falls from 4.0 m above the ground.

Fig. 1.1 shows how the height h above the ground varies with the time t.
4.0
h/m
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) State what happens to the speed of the paper as it falls.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the speed of the paper at time t = 1.5 s.
speed = ………………………………… [2]
(c) As the paper falls, energy changes from one form to another.
State the main energy change between t = 1.0 s and t = 2.0 s.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/M/J/09
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a metal pan containing water on a cooker. The hotplate heats the water. For
Examiner’s
Use
handle
water
X
metal pan
cooker
hotplate
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) State the method of heat transfer through the metal pan.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Describe how the molecules transfer heat through the metal pan.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) On Fig. 2.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of movement of the water at point X.
[1]
(ii) Explain why the water moves in this direction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]

4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows apparatus to measure the specific latent heat of fusion of water. For
In this question, you may ignore heat transfer to the ice from the room. Examiner’s
Use
electric heater
crushed ice at 0°C
funnel
glass beaker
Fig. 3.1
The heater is switched on and water drips into the beaker at a constant rate.
In 2.0 minutes, 31 g of water drips into the beaker. The power of the heater is 85 W.
(a) Calculate the amount of electrical energy supplied to the heater in 2.0 minutes.
energy = ………………………………… [2]
(b) Use your answer to (a) to calculate the specific latent heat of fusion of water.
specific latent heat = ………………………………… [2]
(c) In another experiment using the same heater, ice colder than 0 °C is used.
State why less water drips into the beaker in 2.0 minutes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/M/J/09
5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows the arrangement of molecules in a solid and in a liquid. For
Examiner’s
Use
solid liquid
Fig. 4.1
(a) State one difference between the two arrangements.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) By writing about the forces between molecules and the motion of molecules, explain
why
(i) the molecules of a solid and of a liquid have different arrangements,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the evaporation of a liquid cools the liquid,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) the rate of evaporation is greater when a liquid is hotter.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

6
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a man looking at his reflection in a rectangular plane mirror. For
Examiner’s
Use
plane mirror
Fig. 5.1
The vertical side of the mirror has length h.
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.1, draw a ray of light from point X that is reflected by the mirror to the
man’s eye. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, mark the angle of incidence of your ray at the mirror.
Label this angle i. [1]
(iii) Define the angle of incidence.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 5.1, draw a ray of light from the top of the man’s hat that is reflected by the
mirror to his eye.
Use your rays to determine the smallest value of h that allows the man to see all of the
image in the mirror, from the top of his hat to his toes.
On the diagram, 1 cm represents 0.5 m.
h = ………………………………… [2]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/M/J/09

7
6 Fig. 6.1 shows how ultrasound is used to produce an image of the heart. For
Examiner’s
Use
heart ultrasound
ultrasound
transmitter and detector
Fig. 6.1
(a) Define ultrasound.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The ultrasound has a wavelength of 1.2 × 10–3 m. The speed of the ultrasound in the
human body is 1500 m / s.
Calculate the frequency of the ultrasound.
frequency = ………………………………… [2]
(c) Ultrasound is a longitudinal wave.

Describe how particles in the body move as the ultrasound passes.
You may draw a diagram if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) There are small bubbles of gas in the body.
Explain why these bubbles expand and contract as the ultrasound passes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
8
7 Fig. 7.1 shows two pieces of soft iron in the magnetic field of a strong permanent magnet. For
Examiner’s
Use
soft iron
N pole S pole
of magnet of magnet
Fig. 7.1
The pieces of soft iron become magnetised.
(a) On Fig. 7.1, mark the magnetic poles produced at each end of both pieces of soft iron.
[1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a reed switch.
soft iron
glass
Fig. 7.2
The reed switch is placed between the poles of the strong permanent magnet.
State and explain what happens.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/M/J/09

9
(c) Fig. 7.3 shows two separate electrical circuits. For

Examiner’s
Use
warning lamp
coil
thermistor
Fig. 7.3
One circuit consists of a reed switch, a cell and a warning lamp. The other circuit consists
of a thermistor, another cell, and a coil wound round the reed switch. The thermistor is
at the same temperature as the air around it.
(i) State what happens to the thermistor when the temperature of the air rises.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why the warning lamp lights up when the air temperature rises.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

10
238 For
8 The symbol 92 U represents a nucleus of uranium with nucleon number (mass number) 238 Examiner’s
and proton number (atomic number) 92. Use
(a) State the meaning of nucleon number.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A nucleus of uranium-238 decays to form a nucleus of thorium by the emission of an

alpha-particle.
State
(i) the proton number of an alpha-particle,
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the nucleon number of an alpha-particle,
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) the proton number of thorium,
..................................................................................................................................
(iv) the nucleon number of the thorium isotope formed.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/M/J/09

11
Section B

9 (a) A lamp is marked 24 V, 100 W. Describe an experiment to check that the electrical power
supplied to the lamp is 100 W when the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 24 V.
In your account you should
• include a circuit diagram,
• state the readings that are taken,
• show how the result is calculated from the readings. [4]
(b) Two lamps are connected in parallel to a 240 V mains supply, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
240 V
R
lamp A, 190
Q
lamp B, 380
P
Fig. 9.1
Lamp A has a resistance of 190 Ω and lamp B has a resistance of 380 Ω.
(i) Calculate the current at points P, Q and R. [3]

(ii) Calculate the total resistance of the circuit. [2]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows the same lamps connected in series to the mains supply.
240 V
S
lamp A lamp B
190 380
Fig. 9.2
(i) Calculate the current at point S. [2]

(ii) Calculate the p.d. across lamp A. [1]
(d) In a house, all lamps are connected in parallel to the mains supply, not in series.
State and explain two reasons for this.
In your explanation you may refer to the results of your calculations in (b) and (c). [3]

12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows the horizontal forces as a cyclist travels forwards.
air resistance
driving force
Fig. 10.1
The cyclist produces the driving force that acts on the back wheel.
In this question, you may ignore any frictional force acting on the front wheel.
(a) The bicycle accelerates until a constant speed is reached.
(i) Describe how the size of the air resistance changes during this time. [2]
(ii) Compare the sizes of the two horizontal forces when the bicycle is accelerating. [1]
(b) The total mass of the bicycle and the cyclist is 75 kg. At one instant, the speed of the bicycle
is 4.0 m / s, the driving force is 30 N and the air resistance is 20 N.
Calculate
(i) the total kinetic energy of the bicycle and the cyclist, [3]
(ii) the acceleration of the bicycle and the cyclist. [2]
(c) As the bicycle moves, energy is transmitted from the pedals to the back wheel.
Fig. 10.2 shows what happens to the energy input to the pedals.
20 J of
energy
lost
400 J of
energy energy
input to supplied
pedals to back
wheel
Fig. 10.2
(i) As energy is transmitted to the back wheel, some is lost. Explain how this happens. [2]
(ii) Calculate the efficiency of the bicycle in transmitting energy from the pedals to the back
wheel. [2]
(d) Some bicycles are made from low density materials. Explain why this is an advantage. [3]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/M/J/09

13
11 An a.c. generator produces alternating current.
(a) (i) Draw a labelled diagram of a simple a.c. generator. [3]

(ii) Explain how the current is generated. [2]
(b) The output of the generator is connected to the terminals of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
Fig. 11.1 shows the trace produced on the screen of the oscilloscope.
1 division
trace
Fig. 11.1
(i) Each vertical division on the scale in Fig. 11.1 represents 2 volts.
Describe how you would check that one vertical division represents 2 volts. [4]
(ii) The trace in Fig. 11.1 is too small and is at the bottom of the screen.
Adjustments are made to the oscilloscope controls to produce the trace in Fig. 11.2.
Fig. 11.2
State and explain the adjustments made to the oscilloscope controls. [3]
(iii) Explain how the beam of electrons is produced inside the cathode-ray oscilloscope. [3]

14
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/M/J/09
15
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/M/J/09
16
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/M/J/09

*7839405500 *
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
No Additional Materials are required.
Section A
Section B
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (SM/KN) 15045/3
www.XtremePapers.net
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided. Use
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of a ball. The ball is dropped at time t = 0.
3.0
2.5
2.0
speed
––––– 1.5
m/s
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.04 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.20 0.24 0.28
t /s
Fig. 1.1
(a) After t = 0.20 s, the ball falls at a constant speed.
Explain, using ideas about forces, why the speed of the ball is constant after time
t = 0.20 s.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) At t = 0, a different ball is dropped from rest. Until t = 0.20 s, this ball has a constant
acceleration equal to the acceleration of free-fall. After t = 0.20 s, its acceleration
decreases.
(i) State the value of the acceleration of free-fall.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Determine the speed of the second ball at t = 0.20 s.
speed = ...................................................... [2]
(iii) On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the second ball from t = 0 to t = 0.28 s.
[2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/M/J/10
3
For
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a weight of 4.0 N attached to a spring. Examiner’s
Use
spring rule
pointer
weight
4.0 N
Fig. 2.1
The unstretched length of the spring is 8.0 cm. With the 4.0 N weight attached to the spring,
the length is 14.0 cm. The spring is within its limit of proportionality.
(a) State what is meant by the limit of proportionality of a spring.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The 4.0 N weight is replaced with a 2.0 N weight. Calculate the new length of the spring.
new length = .............................................. [2]
(c) Describe how the apparatus in Fig. 2.1 is used to obtain readings to plot an
extension-load graph.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a student rubbing her hands together. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the main energy conversion that causes the hands to become warm.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State why the hands become even warmer if they are pressed harder together when
rubbing.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The average force used to slide one hand along the other is 1.2 N.
In each movement, one hand moves 0.080 m. The other hand remains stationary.
(i) Calculate the number of movements needed for 2.0 J of work to be done.
number = ................................................... [3]
(ii) Each movement takes 0.20 s. Calculate the average power developed.
power = ...................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/M/J/10
5
4 Fig. 4.1 and Fig.4.2 are diagrams of a ripple tank being used to show two properties of For
waves. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows wavefronts approaching a barrier in the water.
wavefronts
barrier
Fig. 4.1
Complete Fig. 4.1 to show the reflection of the wavefronts at the barrier. [2]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the wavefronts approaching shallow water above a piece of glass.
piece of glass beneath water

wavefronts
Fig. 4.2
(i) Complete Fig. 4.2 to show the wavefronts in the shallow water. [1]
(ii) As the wave passes into the shallow water, state what, if anything, happens to
1. the wave speed, .............................................................................................. [1]
2. the frequency. .................................................................................................. [1]
6
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a ray of white light incident on a glass prism. For
Examiner’s
Use
glass
prism
red
red light
light
white
light
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.1 is not complete; it shows only the ray of red light produced from the white light.
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.1, draw the ray of blue light produced in, and beyond, the prism. [2]
(ii) State two colours of the spectrum found between the red and blue rays.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the same prism with the ray of white light incident at a different angle.
white
light
Q
white
light
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.2 is complete; no spectrum is produced.
(i) Explain why no light emerges from the prism at Q.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why no spectrum is produced.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/M/J/10
7
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a circuit used in an experiment to measure the current in a lamp for different For
values of the potential difference (p.d.) across the lamp. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 6.1
(a) State the name of component P.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) On the axes below, sketch a graph of current against p.d. for a filament lamp.
current
0
0
p.d.
[2]
(c) (i) State how the resistance of the lamp changes as the p.d. increases.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain how the graph in (b) shows the change you have described in (c)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
8
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit with two resistors in series. For
Examiner’s
Use
800 Ω
6V 1600 Ω V
Fig. 7.1
(i) Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ……………………… .................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = …………………… ....... [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 and Fig. 7.3 show circuits containing a capacitor and a transistor respectively.
open high
switch resistance
transistor
capacitor V open
switch
Fig. 7.2 Fig. 7.3
EITHER Explain the action of the capacitor shown in Fig. 7.2 when the switch is closed.
..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... [2]
OR Explain the action of the transistor shown in Fig. 7.3 when the switch is closed.
..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/M/J/10
9
8 Fig. 8.1 shows two coils of wire wound on an iron ring. One coil is connected in series to a For
switch and a d.c. supply. The other coil is connected to a very sensitive centre-zero ammeter. Examiner’s
Use
iron ring
open
switch
d.c. centre-zero
supply ammeter
Fig. 8.1
At first the switch is open, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
The following actions are taken in turn.
Describe and explain what happens to the reading on the ammeter in each case.
(a) The switch is closed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The switch is left closed for a long time.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The switch is opened.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
10
Section B For
Examiner’s
Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided. Use
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a laboratory thermometer.
°C –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) State the range of the thermometer.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State one change in the design of the thermometer to increase its range.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Describe how the behaviour of a more sensitive thermometer is different from a
less sensitive thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State one change in the design of the thermometer to make it more sensitive.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Describe how a clinical thermometer differs from a laboratory thermometer. A diagram
may be included in your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/M/J/10
11
(d) (i) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple thermometer. For
Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(ii) State two reasons why a thermocouple thermometer is sometimes a better choice
than a laboratory thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Fig. 9.2 shows a copper block of mass 1.8 kg with two holes in the top. An 80 W heater is
placed in one hole and a thermometer in the other.
thermometer
heater
copper block
Fig. 9.2
The heater is switched on for 5.0 minutes. Assume that no energy is lost from the block.
(i) Calculate the energy supplied to the block.
energy supplied = ...................................... [2]
(ii) The specific heat capacity of copper is 390 J / (kg °C). Calculate the rise in
temperature of the block.
temperature rise = ..................................... [2]
12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a car braking system. The brake fluid is an oily liquid. For
Examiner’s
Use
brake drum
brake pedal brake shoe
pivot
return spring
pivot
master cylinder
slave pistons
master piston
brake fluid
Fig. 10.1
The brake drum rotates with the wheel of the car.
(a) Explain how pushing the brake pedal makes the brake shoes rub against the drum.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The cross-sectional area of the master piston is 2.0 cm2. A force of 140 N is applied to
the master piston.
(i) Calculate the pressure created in the brake fluid by the master piston.
pressure = ................................... N / cm2 [2]
(ii) The cross-sectional area of each slave piston is 2.8 cm2.
Calculate the force exerted on each slave piston by the brake fluid.
force = ....................................................... [2]
(iii) The force exerted on the master piston is greater than the force applied by the foot
on the brake pedal. Using the principle of moments, explain this.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/M/J/10
13
(c) Fig. 10.2 shows a master cylinder sealed at one end. Instead of brake fluid, the cylinder For
contains air. Examiner’s
Use
sealed end
piston of area
2.0 cm2 d
air
Fig. 10.2
When a force is applied to the piston, the length d changes from 6.0 cm to 4.0 cm.
The pressure of the air increases but the temperature stays constant.
(i) Describe how the molecules of the air exert a pressure.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why the pressure increases even though the temperature stays constant.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) The initial pressure of the air inside the cylinder is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
Calculate the final pressure of the air. State the formula that you use in your
calculation.
pressure = ................................................. [3]
(d) Air bubbles form in the brake fluid of Fig. 10.1. State the effect this has on the braking
system.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
14
11 (a) Complete the table of Fig. 11.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
type of radiation nature of radiation charge
alpha-particle two protons and two neutrons positive
beta-particle
gamma-ray
Fig. 11.1
[4]
(b) Technetium-99 is a radioactive isotope that emits gamma-rays and it has a half-life of
6.0 hours.
In a hospital, a solution containing this isotope is injected into a patient. The solution
travels around the body and the isotope attaches to cancer cells. A few hours after the
injection, an instrument is used to detect the gamma-rays emitted by the isotope. A high
reading on the instrument indicates the position of cancer cells.
(i) Explain what is meant by half-life.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain why an isotope emitting gamma-rays is used rather than an isotope emitting
alpha-particles.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/M/J/10
15
(iii) Explain why using an isotope with a half-life of 6 hours is better than using an For
isotope with a half-life of 6 minutes. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iv) Explain why using an isotope with a half-life of 6 hours is better than using an
isotope with a half-life of 6 days.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A different radioactive isotope used in hospitals has a half-life of 13 hours.
A sample of this isotope and a detector are placed in a lead box.
The count rate is recorded every minute for three minutes.
The values obtained are 3202, 3140 and 3258 counts per minute.
(i) Explain why the three readings are not the same.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Estimate the time taken for the average count rate to fall to 200 counts per minute.
time taken = ............................................... [3]
(iii) The sample and the detector are taken out of the lead box. The count rate rises
slightly because of background radiation.
State one cause of background radiation.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/M/J/10
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/M/J/10
*4238928134*
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
This document consists of 16 printed pages and 4 blank pages.
DC (CW/SW) 24586/2
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A journey consists of two displacements: the first is 500 m in a northerly direction and the
second is 200 m in an easterly direction.
(a) In the space below draw, to scale, a vector diagram of these displacements.
State the scale of your diagram.

On your diagram, show the two displacements and the resultant displacement.
Determine the size (magnitude) and direction of the resultant displacement.
scale = ......................................................
size = ......................................................
direction = ......................................................
[3]
(b) Another journey covers a distance of 700 m. Describe how it is possible that this journey
has no resultant displacement.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a motor used to operate a lift (elevator). There is a man in the lift. For
Examiner’s
Use
motor
cable
lift
Fig. 2.1 (not to scale)
The input power to the motor is 6200 watts.
(a) Define the watt.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The lift and the man have a total mass of 580 kg. The lift moves up a distance of 12 m
in 15 s.
(i) Calculate the tension in the cable when the lift is moving at constant speed.
tension = ................................ [1]
(ii) Calculate the increase in potential energy of the lift and man.
potential energy = ................................ [2]
(iii) Calculate the efficiency of the motor.
efficiency = ................................ [2]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a metal roof. One side is facing the Sun. For
Examiner’s
sunlight Use
metal roof
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the means by which thermal energy (heat) is transferred from the Sun to the Earth
and explain why other means of thermal energy transfer are not involved.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe how thermal energy is transferred through the metal roof from the heated
surface.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) During the night, the metal roof loses 1.2 × 106 J of thermal energy and its temperature
falls by 20 °C.
The specific heat capacity of the metal in the roof is 400 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the mass of metal in the roof.
mass = ................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
5
4 A student notices puddles of water on a road, as shown in Fig. 4.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
puddle of water
Fig. 4.1
Later in the day, he passes the puddles again and some of the water has evaporated.
(a) State two changes to the atmospheric conditions that would cause the water to evaporate
faster.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, what happens during evaporation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
6
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a ray of light entering a semi-circular glass block and striking the glass surface For
at M, the mid-point of the straight face. Examiner’s
Use
M
glass block
Fig. 5.1
(a) The ray of light strikes the glass surface at M with an angle of incidence C equal to the
critical angle of light in glass.
(i) State what is meant by critical angle.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, mark and label the angle C. [1]

(iii) On Fig. 5.1, continue the ray of light after it strikes the glass surface at M. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a second ray of light striking M.
Fig. 5.2
This ray has an angle of incidence at M smaller than the critical angle.
On Fig. 5.2, continue this ray of light after it strikes the glass surface at M. [1]
(c) The refractive index of this glass is 1.5. A third ray of light enters the block from air with
an angle of incidence of 50°. Calculate the angle of refraction.
angle= ................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
7
6 (a) An aeroplane becomes positively-charged as it flies through the air, because it loses For
particles from its metal surface. Examiner’s
Use
(i) State the name of the particles lost from the metal surface.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The tyres of the aeroplane are made from an electrical conductor.
Explain what happens to the charge on the aeroplane when it lands.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Suggest why it is necessary to keep an aeroplane connected electrically to earth during
refuelling.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
8
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a compass. For

Examiner’s
compass needle Use
Fig. 7.1
The compass needle is a small magnet free to rotate. The head of the arrow on the compass
needle is an N-pole.
(a) A bar magnet is placed between two compasses, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
N
bar magnet
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2, draw the needles inside the two compasses and mark the N-pole of both
compass needles. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.3 shows the structure of a relay.
contacts
pivot
soft iron
soft iron
coil
Fig. 7.3
Explain how closing the switch causes the contacts to close.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
9
(c) Fig. 7.4 is a circuit that includes a relay. For

Examiner’s
Use
LDR lamp
C
relay coil
Fig. 7.4
When light shines on the light-dependent resistor (LDR), the relay contacts C close.
(i) State what happens to the resistance of the LDR when light falls on it.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The circuit for the lamp, as shown in Fig. 7.4, is not complete.
On Fig. 7.4, draw the connections to the lamp, the contacts C and the battery that
cause the lamp to switch on when light shines on the LDR. [2]
10
8 A radioactive rock emits gamma-rays. A teacher plans an experiment to show a class that For
the emission of gamma-rays from the rock is random in time. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) State the apparatus that the teacher needs to detect the gamma-rays.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State one safety precaution that the teacher must take.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Describe how the experiment is performed.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Describe what is meant by a gamma-ray.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
11
BLANK PAGE
Please turn over for Section B.
12
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a car braking on a road and coming to rest.
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain what is meant by
(i) the thinking distance,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the braking distance.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) An engineer conducts a test on the car and finds that the braking distance is greater
when the car is fully loaded than when it is unloaded.
(i) Apart from the road conditions, state what must be kept the same in the test.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why the car has a greater braking distance when fully loaded.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State and explain how one road condition affects the braking distance of the car. Use
ideas about friction in your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Explain how wider tyres affect the pressure of the car on the surface of the road.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
13
(e) The car has a total mass of 900 kg and is travelling at 20 m / s. At time t = 0, the driver For
sees an accident ahead. He applies the brakes at t = 0.60 s to stop the car. After the Examiner’s
brakes are applied, the car comes to rest in a further 4.0 s. Use
(i) Calculate the deceleration of the car as it brakes.
deceleration = ................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the braking force acting on the car.
force = ................................ [2]
(iii) On Fig. 9.2, draw a speed-time graph for the car as it brakes.
[3]
Fig. 9.2
(iv) State how your graph in (iii) can be used to find the total distance travelled by the
car.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
14
10 (a) Describe a method for measuring the speed of sound in air. In your account, For
state clearly Examiner’s
• how the sound is made, Use
• what measurements are taken,

• how the result is calculated,
• one precaution to produce an accurate result.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) Ultrasound is used in quality control to detect cracks in metal.
Pulses of ultrasound are sent into the metal from a transmitter. A detector is placed next
to the transmitter on the front surface of the metal.
Fig. 10.1 shows the oscilloscope trace of the ultrasound pulses produced if the metal
contains no cracks.
S S S S S
R R R R
1.0 x 10–6 s
Fig. 10.1
One division along the x-axis represents 1.0 × 10–6 s.
Pulses labelled S are the pulses initially sent out from the transmitter. Each pulse
labelled R is the reflection from the back surface of the metal of the previous pulse S.
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
15
(i) State what is meant by ultrasound. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Use Fig. 10.1 to calculate the number of pulses sent out by the source in one
second.
number = ................................ [2]
(iii) Suggest two reasons why the amplitude of R is less than the amplitude of S.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Some time later, the piece of metal is tested again. It now has a small crack
half-way between the front surface and the back surface.
On Fig. 10.1, draw the position and size of the pulses produced by this crack.
Label each of these pulses C. [2]
(v) A second beam of ultrasound has a frequency of 8.0 × 106 Hz and a speed of
4000 m / s i n the metal .
Calculate the wavelength of this ultrasound in the metal.
wavelength = ................................ [2]
16
11 (a) Describe an experiment, including an ammeter and a voltmeter, to show how the For
resistance of a wire varies with temperature. Draw a circuit diagram. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The filament in a lamp is made from metal wire.
(i) Describe the variation with temperature of the resistance of the filament lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 11.1, sketch a graph of the variation of the current in the filament against
the potential difference (p.d.) across it.
current
0
0 p.d.
[2]
Fig. 11.1
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
17
(c) Fig. 11.2 is a circuit used to monitor changes in room temperature. For
Examiner’s
6.0 V Use
2000 Ω
thermistor
V
Fig. 11.2
A thermistor is connected in series with a 6.0 V battery and a 2000 Ω resistor.
(i) The temperature of the room increases. State and explain what happens to
1. the reading on the ammeter,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. the reading on the voltmeter.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) At a certain temperature, the reading on the voltmeter is 3.8 V. Calculate the
resistance of the thermistor at this temperature.
resistance = ................................ [3]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/M/J/10
*1154395656*
PHYSICS 5054/23
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
DC (SLM) 29465
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A journey consists of two displacements: the first is 500 m in a northerly direction and the
second is 200 m in an easterly direction.
(a) In the space below draw, to scale, a vector diagram of these displacements.
State the scale of your diagram.

On your diagram, show the two displacements and the resultant displacement.
Determine the size (magnitude) and direction of the resultant displacement.
scale = ......................................................
size = ......................................................
direction = ......................................................
[3]
(b) Another journey covers a distance of 700 m. Describe how it is possible that this journey
has no resultant displacement.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a motor used to operate a lift (elevator). There is a man in the lift. For
Examiner’s
Use
motor
cable
lift
The input power to the motor is 6200 watts.
(a) Define the watt.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The lift and the man have a total mass of 580 kg. The lift moves up a distance of 12 m
in 15 s.
(i) Calculate the tension in the cable when the lift is moving at constant speed.
tension = ................................ [1]
(ii) Calculate the increase in potential energy of the lift and man.
potential energy = ................................ [2]
(iii) Calculate the efficiency of the motor.
efficiency = ................................ [2]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a metal roof. One side is facing the Sun. For
Examiner’s
sunlight Use
metal roof
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the means by which thermal energy (heat) is transferred from the Sun to the Earth
and explain why other means of thermal energy transfer are not involved.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe how thermal energy is transferred through the metal roof from the heated
surface.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) During the night, the metal roof loses 1.2 × 106 J of thermal energy and its temperature
falls by 20 °C.
The specific heat capacity of the metal in the roof is 400 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the mass of metal in the roof.
mass = ................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
5
4 A student notices puddles of water on a road, as shown in Fig. 4.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
puddle of water
Fig. 4.1
Later in the day, he passes the puddles again and some of the water has evaporated.
(a) State two changes to the atmospheric conditions that would cause the water to evaporate
faster.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, what happens during evaporation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
6
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a ray of light entering a semi-circular glass block and striking the glass surface For
at M, the mid-point of the straight face. Examiner’s
Use
M
glass block
Fig. 5.1
(a) The ray of light strikes the glass surface at M with an angle of incidence C equal to the
critical angle of light in glass.
(i) State what is meant by critical angle.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, mark and label the angle C. [1]

(iii) On Fig. 5.1, continue the ray of light after it strikes the glass surface at M. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a second ray of light striking M.
Fig. 5.2
This ray has an angle of incidence at M smaller than the critical angle.
On Fig. 5.2, continue this ray of light after it strikes the glass surface at M. [1]
(c) The refractive index of this glass is 1.5. A third ray of light enters the block from air with
an angle of incidence of 50°. Calculate the angle of refraction.
angle= ................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
7
6 (a) An aeroplane becomes positively-charged as it flies through the air, because it loses For
particles from its metal surface. Examiner’s
Use
(i) State the name of the particles lost from the metal surface.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The tyres of the aeroplane are made from an electrical conductor.
Explain what happens to the charge on the aeroplane when it lands.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Suggest why it is necessary to keep an aeroplane connected electrically to earth during
refuelling.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
8
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a compass. For

Examiner’s
compass needle Use
Fig. 7.1
The compass needle is a small magnet free to rotate. The head of the arrow on the compass
needle is an N-pole.
(a) A bar magnet is placed between two compasses, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
N
bar magnet
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2, draw the needles inside the two compasses and mark the N-pole of both
compass needles. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.3 shows the structure of a relay.
contacts
pivot
soft iron
soft iron
coil
Fig. 7.3
Explain how closing the switch causes the contacts to close.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
9
(c) Fig. 7.4 is a circuit that includes a relay. For

Examiner’s
Use
LDR lamp
C
relay coil
Fig. 7.4
When light shines on the light-dependent resistor (LDR), the relay contacts C close.
(i) State what happens to the resistance of the LDR when light falls on it.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The circuit for the lamp, as shown in Fig. 7.4, is not complete.
On Fig. 7.4, draw the connections to the lamp, the contacts C and the battery that
cause the lamp to switch on when light shines on the LDR. [2]
10
8 A radioactive rock emits gamma-rays. A teacher plans an experiment to show a class that For
the emission of gamma-rays from the rock is random in time. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) State the apparatus that the teacher needs to detect the gamma-rays.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State one safety precaution that the teacher must take.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Describe how the experiment is performed.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Describe what is meant by a gamma-ray.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
11
BLANK PAGE
12
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a car braking on a road and coming to rest.
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain what is meant by
(i) the thinking distance,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the braking distance.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) An engineer conducts a test on the car and finds that the braking distance is greater
when the car is fully loaded than when it is unloaded.
(i) Apart from the road conditions, state what must be kept the same in the test.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why the car has a greater braking distance when fully loaded.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State and explain how one road condition affects the braking distance of the car. Use
ideas about friction in your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Explain how wider tyres affect the pressure of the car on the surface of the road.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
13
(e) The car has a total mass of 900 kg and is travelling at 20 m / s. At time t = 0, the driver For
sees an accident ahead. He applies the brakes at t = 0.60 s to stop the car. After the Examiner’s
brakes are applied, the car comes to rest in a further 4.0 s. Use
(i) Calculate the deceleration of the car as it brakes.
deceleration = ................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the braking force acting on the car.
force = ................................ [2]
(iii) On Fig. 9.2, draw a speed-time graph for the car as it brakes.
[3]
Fig. 9.2
(iv) State how your graph in (iii) can be used to find the total distance travelled by the
car.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
14
10 (a) Describe a method for measuring the speed of sound in air. In your account, For
state clearly Examiner’s
• how the sound is made, Use
• what measurements are taken,

• how the result is calculated,
• one precaution to produce an accurate result.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) Ultrasound is used in quality control to detect cracks in metal.
Pulses of ultrasound are sent into the metal from a transmitter. A detector is placed next
to the transmitter on the front surface of the metal.
Fig. 10.1 shows the oscilloscope trace of the ultrasound pulses produced if the metal
contains no cracks.
S S S S S
R R R R
1.0 x 10–6 s
Fig. 10.1
One division along the x-axis represents 1.0 × 10–6 s.
Pulses labelled S are the pulses initially sent out from the transmitter. Each pulse
labelled R is the reflection from the back surface of the metal of the previous pulse S.
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
15
(i) State what is meant by ultrasound. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Use Fig. 10.1 to calculate the number of pulses sent out by the source in one
second.
number = ................................ [2]
(iii) Suggest two reasons why the amplitude of R is less than the amplitude of S.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Some time later, the piece of metal is tested again. It now has a small crack
half-way between the front surface and the back surface.
On Fig. 10.1, draw the position and size of the pulses produced by this crack.
Label each of these pulses C. [2]
(v) A second beam of ultrasound has a frequency of 8.0 × 106 Hz and a speed of
4000 m / s i n the metal .
Calculate the wavelength of this ultrasound in the metal.
wavelength = ................................ [2]
16
11 (a) Describe an experiment, including an ammeter and a voltmeter, to show how the For
resistance of a wire varies with temperature. Draw a circuit diagram. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The filament in a lamp is made from metal wire.
(i) Describe the variation with temperature of the resistance of the filament lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 11.1, sketch a graph of the variation of the current in the filament against
the potential difference (p.d.) across it.
current
0
0 p.d.
[2]
Fig. 11.1
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
17
(c) Fig. 11.2 is a circuit used to monitor changes in room temperature. For
Examiner’s
6.0 V Use
2000 Ω
thermistor
V
Fig. 11.2
A thermistor is connected in series with a 6.0 V battery and a 2000 Ω resistor.
(i) The temperature of the room increases. State and explain what happens to
1. the reading on the ammeter,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. the reading on the voltmeter.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) At a certain temperature, the reading on the voltmeter is 3.8 V. Calculate the
resistance of the thermistor at this temperature.
resistance = ................................ [3]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/M/J/10
* 4 8 1 8 9 0 7 6 0 2 *
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
DC (NF/DJ) 31813/4
2
Section A
Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a car.
20
speed
m/s
15
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
t /s
Fig. 1.1
At time t = 15 s, the brakes are applied and the car comes to rest with uniform deceleration.
(a) (i) State the speed of the car just before the brakes are applied.
speed = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain what is meant by uniform deceleration.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A lorry travels at a constant speed of 18 m / s for 15 s. At time t = 15 s, the brakes are applied
and the lorry slows down with the same deceleration as the car.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the lorry. [2]
(ii) Explain how your graph shows that, while braking, the lorry travels further than the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/M/J/11

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a sky-diver falling vertically downwards at terminal velocity.
Fig. 2.1
Arrows X and Y show the two main forces acting on the sky-diver.
(a) (i) State the name of force X and the name of force Y.
X ........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Explain why force Y acts upwards.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When the sky-diver first started to fall, forces X and Y were unbalanced.
(i) Describe and explain the effect of the unbalanced forces on the motion of the sky-diver.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what happened to the size of force X and the size of force Y as the sky-diver fell
and reached terminal velocity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows part of a small hydroelectric system that generates electricity from moving water.
generator
turbine
pipe
water
Fig. 3.1
(a) Every minute, water with kinetic energy 14 000 J emerges from the pipe. The water turns a
turbine that is connected to the generator.
Half of the kinetic energy of the water is given to the generator.
(i) Calculate the power input to the generator.
power = .......................................................... [3]
(ii) Suggest a reason why only some of the kinetic energy of the water is given to the
generator.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Hydroelectric systems use sources of renewable energy.
(i) State what is meant by renewable energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one source of non-renewable energy.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/M/J/11

5
4 Water at a temperature of 16 °C enters an ice-making machine and emerges as ice cubes at a

temperature of –5 °C. The melting point of ice is 0 °C.
(a) Calculate the total energy removed from 1.0 kg of water as it cools from 16 °C, changes into
ice, and then cools to –5 °C.
specific heat capacity of liquid water = 4.2 × 103 J / (kg °C)

specific latent heat of fusion of water = 3.4 × 105 J / kg
specific heat capacity of ice = 2.1 × 103 J / (kg °C)
energy = .......................................................... [3]
(b) Using ideas about molecules,
(i) explain why energy is needed to change ice into water,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) suggest why less energy is needed to change ice into water than to change the same
mass of water into steam.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
5 The fluorescent tube shown in Fig. 5.1 converts electrical energy into light more efficiently than a
filament lamp.
fluorescent coating
gas
Fig. 5.1
In the gas inside the tube, both light and ultra-violet radiation are produced.
There is a fluorescent coating on the inside surface of the tube.
(a) Explain the purpose of the fluorescent coating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State the name of one region of the electromagnetic spectrum with wavelengths shorter than
ultra-violet radiation.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The ultra-violet radiation inside the tube has a wavelength of 3.6 × 10–7 m. Calculate the
frequency of the ultra-violet radiation.
(speed of light = 3.0 × 108 m / s)
frequency = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/M/J/11

7
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a bat.
Fig. 6.1
Bats emit short bursts of ultrasound. The echoes of the ultrasound help the bat find insects and
prevent the bat flying into objects.
(a) State what is meant by an echo.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the variation with time of air pressure caused by a burst of ultrasound.
air
pressure
time
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw a possible echo formed by this burst of ultrasound. [2]
(c) State
(i) the approximate range of frequencies of sound audible to humans,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) how the frequency of ultrasound differs from frequencies in this audible range.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

8
7 Fig. 7.1 shows the structure of a circuit-breaker that uses an electromagnet. The circuit-breaker
operates when the current is 10 A.
current in
electromagnet
iron bar fixed bar
pivot
spring
contacts
copper bar
current out
pivot
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, mark with an arrow the force on the iron bar caused by the electromagnet. [1]
(b) Suggest one reason why the iron bar does not move when the current is less than 10 A.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) When the current is greater than 10 A, the circuit-breaker stops the current. Explain what
happens in the circuit-breaker when this occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) State and explain how the electromagnet can be altered so that the circuit-breaker stops the
current at less than 10 A.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/M/J/11

9
8 (a) A wire carrying a current in a magnetic field experiences a force due to the current. On
Fig. 8.1, insert the words current, field and force in the boxes to show the relative directions
of the current, the magnetic field and the force.
Fig. 8.1
[1]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a current-carrying coil ABCD in a magnetic field.
20 N
B C
N-pole S-pole
A D
20 N
Fig. 8.2
Each side of the coil is 4.0 cm in length. The force on AB is 20 N and the force on CD is 20 N.
(i) Calculate the total moment caused by these forces.
moment = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) The moment is increased by using a stronger magnetic field.
State two other ways to increase the moment.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
10
Section B
Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a rotating magnet in an alternating current generator that is used to power a lamp.
magnet
soft iron
N S
coil
lamp
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) State how an alternating current differs from a direct current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, in detail, how alternating current is produced by the apparatus shown in
Fig. 9.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) State two ways in which the current in the lamp may be increased.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/M/J/11

11
(b) The generators at a power station produce a voltage of 25 000 V. This voltage is stepped up
to 400 000 V by a transformer for long-distance transmission on overhead power lines. The
voltage is later stepped down to 240 V.
(i) State and explain why the voltage is stepped up for long-distance transmission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the ratio of the number of turns in the primary coil of the step-up transformer to
the number of turns in its secondary coil.
ratio = .......................................................... [1]
(iii) State one advantage and one disadvantage of using thicker wire in the overhead power
lines.
advantage: .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage: ....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) An electric drill of power 1000 W is used in a country where the mains voltage is 240 V.
State and explain the most appropriate fuse to use with this drill.
You should select a fuse from the following values: 1 A, 3 A, 4 A, 13 A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

12
10 (a) A 1500 Ω resistor is used on an electronic circuit board in a television.
Fig. 10.1 shows the bands on a resistor.
digit or colour
multiplier
0 black
1 brown
band 1 band 3
2 red
3 orange
4 yellow
5 green
band 2 6 blue
7 violet
Fig. 10.1
8 grey
9 white
Fig. 10.2
The table of Fig. 10.2 shows the colour code for the bands.
(i) State the colours of the bands on a 1500 Ω resistor.
band 1 ...............................................................
band 2 ...............................................................
band 3 ...............................................................
[2]
(ii) Determine the maximum value of resistance that can be shown with this three-band
colour code.
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
(iii) The 1500 Ω resistor on the electronic circuit board has a correct power rating of 0.25 W.
State a disadvantage of using a different 1500 Ω resistor with a power rating that is
1. much less than 0.25 W,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. much greater than 0.25 W.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/M/J/11

13
(b) Fig. 10.3 shows part of a circuit that includes a variable resistor R and a battery of e.m.f.
9.0 V.
9.0 V
X Y
Fig. 10.3
(i) State one similarity and one difference between electromotive force (e.m.f.) and potential
difference (p.d.).
similarity: ...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
difference: ..........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) A light-emitting diode (LED) is connected between points X and Y, so that it emits light.
On Fig. 10.3, draw the symbol for the LED connected between points X and Y. [2]
(iii) The resistance of R is increased. State what happens to the p.d. across the LED and to
the current in the LED.
p.d.: ....................................................................................................................................
current: ..............................................................................................................................
[1]
(iv) The LED is marked “maximum current 25 mA when the p.d. is 1.7 V”.
Calculate the minimum value of the resistance of R.
resistance = .......................................................... [4]

14
11 An atom of one isotope of sodium contains 11 protons, 13 neutrons and 11 electrons.
(a) (i) State the nucleon number (mass number) of this isotope.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the number of protons is equal to the number of electrons in a neutral atom.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A nucleus of this isotope undergoes radioactive decay by the emission of a beta-particle.
(i) State the energy change that occurs during radioactive decay.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Complete the nuclear equation that represents this decay by filling in the appropriate
numbers in the blank spaces. Na is the chemical symbol for sodium.
...... ...... ......

11
Na ......
β + ......
Mg [4]
(c) At the start of an experiment, the count rate due to a sample of this isotope of sodium is found
to be 1200 counts per minute. This is shown on Fig. 11.1 by a point plotted at time t = 0.
The half-life of this isotope is 15 hours.
(i) On Fig. 11.1, draw a smooth line to show how the count rate is expected to change
between t = 0 and t = 30 hours. [3]
1200
count rate
counts per minute
800
400
0
0 10 20 30
t / hours
Fig. 11.1
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/M/J/11

15
(ii) Explain why readings taken in an actual experiment may not follow a smooth line.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Determine the count rate due to this isotope 30 hours before the start of the experiment.
count rate = .......................................................... [1]
(iv) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus used to measure the count
rate of the radioactive isotope.
[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/M/J/11

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/M/J/11

* 4 6 1 8 5 0 5 1 0 2 *
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
DC (CB (SE/SW)) 31879/7

2
Section A
1 A student wishes to find the density of a stone. He uses a measuring cylinder and a spring balance
with a scale marked in newtons. The measuring cylinder, spring balance and stone are shown in
Fig. 1.1.
thread
cm3
100
0
90 stone
80 1
70 N 2
60
50 3
40 4
30
20
10
Fig. 1.1
The student knows that the gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.
(a) Describe how the student uses the spring balance to find the mass of the stone.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Describe how the student uses the measuring cylinder to find the volume of the stone.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The mass of the stone is 150 g and its volume is 70 cm3.
Calculate the density of the stone.
density of stone = ...............................................[1]
(d) The stone is taken to another place, where the gravitational field strength is less than
10 N / kg. State how this affects the mass and the weight of the stone.
mass .........................................................................................................................................
weight .......................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/M/J/11

3
2 Fig. 2.1 illustrates the journey of a cyclist from point A to point B. Points A and B are at the same
height.
A B
Fig. 2.1
The cyclist starts from rest at A and pedals up and over a hill. Near the bottom of the hill, she
starts to brake and comes to rest at B.
(a) Describe the energy changes that take place as she pedals up the hill at constant speed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Explain how the law of conservation of energy applies to the complete journey from A to B.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) At one point in the journey, the gravitational potential energy of the cyclist has increased by
5400 J. The mass of the cyclist is 60 kg. The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.
Calculate the height above A of the cyclist at this point.
height above A = ................................................[2]

4
3 (a) Explain, using ideas about molecules,
(i) why a balloon filled with gas expands when heated,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) why a balloon filled with water expands very little when heated.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) A bubble of gas rises from the bottom of a lake to the surface. The pressure at the bottom
of the lake is 3.0 × 105 Pa and the pressure at the surface is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The volume of
the bubble at the bottom of the lake is 2.0 cm3.
Calculate the volume of the bubble at the surface.
volume = .............................................................[2]
(ii) State one assumption that you have made in your calculation in (i).
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/M/J/11

5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows circular wavefronts produced at the centre of a circular ripple tank.
cork A
cork B
8.0 cm
Fig. 4.1
Two corks, A and B, float on the water in the ripple tank. They move up and down on the surface of
the water as the wave passes. The wavelength of the wave is 8.0 cm.
Fig. 4.2 shows how the displacement of A varies with time.
+2
displacement
/ mm 0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25
–2 time / s
Fig. 4.2
(a) State the amplitude of the vibrations of A as the wave passes.
amplitude = .........................................................[1]
(b) The horizontal distance between A and B is half the wavelength of the wave.
On Fig. 4.2, sketch a graph to show how the displacement of B varies with time. [2]
(c) (i) Use Fig. 4.2 to determine the frequency of the wave.
frequency = .........................................................[2]
(ii) The distance between the centre of the ripple tank and its edge is 40 cm.
Determine the time taken by a wavefront to travel from the centre of the tank to the
edge.
time = ..................................................................[2]

6
5 Fig. 5.1 shows part of a low-voltage lighting circuit.
12 V
Fig. 5.1
The power supply voltage is 12 V.
(a) On Fig. 5.1, complete the circuit, adding components as necessary, so that:
• the total current in the circuit can be measured,

• lamp A is on all the time,
• lamps B and C are in series with each other and are switched on or off together.
[3]
(b) All the lamps are on. The potential difference (p.d.) across lamp B is 8.0 V and the current in
lamp B is 50 mA.
(i) Calculate the resistance of lamp B.
resistance = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) State the current in lamp C.
current = ............................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/M/J/11

7
6 The cable from the mains plug to a washing machine contains a live wire, a neutral wire and an
earth wire. The earth wire is connected to the metal case of the washing machine.
(a) Explain how connecting the earth wire to the metal case makes the washing machine safer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) When in use, the average input power to the washing machine is 500 W.
Calculate the number of kW h of energy used by the washing machine in 45 minutes of use.
number of kW h = ................................................[2]

8
7 Fig. 7.1 shows some parts of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
electron
anode beam
filament fluorescent
screen
B
Fig. 7.1
(a) Explain why reversing battery A has no effect on the electron beam.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The connections to battery B are reversed. State and explain the effect on the electron
beam.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/M/J/11

9
8 Fig. 8.1 illustrates the process that occurs in the core of a nuclear reactor.
daughter
nucleus
uranium-235
nucleus
neutron
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the name of the process illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Describe what happens during this process.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Some of the waste from a nuclear reactor is radioactive with a long half-life.
Explain what is meant by
(i) radioactive,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) a long half-life.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

10
Section B
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a sky-diver falling vertically.
Fig. 9.1
The sky-diver starts from rest at time t = 0.

His acceleration is non-uniform until he reaches a steady speed of 50 m / s at t = 10 s.
He opens his parachute at t = 20 s and decelerates until t = 25 s.
From t = 25 s he falls at a steady speed of 5 m / s.
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.2, draw the speed-time graph for the sky-diver. [4]
60
speed
m/s
40
20
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
t /s
Fig. 9.2
(ii) State how your graph shows that the acceleration is non-uniform between
t = 0 and t = 10 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/M/J/11

11
(b) Explain, in detail, why after the sky-diver opens his parachute, he decelerates and eventually
reaches a steady speed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) For the time interval between t = 10 s and t = 20 s, calculate the distance that the
sky-diver falls.
distance = ...........................................................[1]
(d) The mass of the sky-diver is 60 kg.
For the time interval between t = 20 s and t = 25 s,
(i) calculate the average deceleration of the sky-diver,
average deceleration = .......................................[2]
(ii) calculate the average resultant force acting on the sky-diver,
force = ................................................................[2]
(iii) state how your graph in Fig. 9.2 may be used to obtain the distance that the sky-diver
falls.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

12
10 (a) Describe an experiment to measure the critical angle for light in glass or perspex.
Your answer should include a labelled diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/M/J/11

13
(b) Fig. 10.1 represents a simple camera.
camera film
object
lens
Fig. 10.1 (to scale)
(i) State the type of lens used in this simple camera.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Draw two rays from the top of the object to show how the image is formed on the film.
Mark and label the image on the film. [3]
(iii) Define the term linear magnification.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Fig. 10.1 is drawn to scale. Determine the linear magnification of the object shown in
Fig. 10.1.
magnification = ...................................................[1]
(v) Apart from its size, state one other property of the image formed by the lens.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(vi) Explain why, when taking photographs of other objects, it may be necessary to move the
lens towards the film.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]

14
11 (a) In an experiment to measure the specific heat capacity of water, an electric heater heats
water in a glass beaker. The temperature of the water is measured at regular intervals of time.
Fig. 11.1 shows how the temperature varies with time t.
100
temperature
/ °C
80
60
40
20
0 100 200 300
t /s
Fig. 11.1
(i) Use Fig. 11.1 to determine the change in temperature between
t = 0 and t = 100 s,
change = .................................................................
t = 100 s and t = 200 s.

change = .................................................................
[1]
(ii) State and explain why the values in (i) are different.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Describe and explain what happens to the water if the heating is continued.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/M/J/11

15
(b) (i) The experiment in (a) is repeated using 72 g of water. The heater supplies 7400 J of
thermal energy (heat) to the water and the temperature rise of the water is 23 °C.
Calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
specific heat capacity = ......................................[2]
(ii) A bullet of mass 72 g is fired from a gun at a speed of 450 m / s.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the bullet.
energy = .............................................................[3]
(iii) The amount of internal energy gained by the water and the amount of kinetic energy
gained by the bullet are approximately equal.
Describe the change in the motion of the molecules of the water and of the molecules of
the bullet that this addition of energy has caused.
water: .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
bullet: .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) A thermocouple is used in the experiment in (a). In the space below, draw a labelled diagram
of a thermocouple thermometer. Show clearly the part of the thermocouple that is placed in
the water in this experiment.
[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/M/J/11
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/M/J/11

* 8 6 0 6 3 2 1 6 9 4 *
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
DC (SJF/SW) 42020/5
2
Section A
1 An astronaut standing on the Moon throws a stone vertically upwards. The stone leaves his hand
at time t = 0. The line on Fig. 1.1 shows how the velocity v of the stone varies with time t until
t = 2.0 s.
4
v
m/s
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
t /s
–2
–4
–6
Fig. 1.1
(a) After rising, the stone falls. The astronaut catches the stone at t = 6.0 s.
There is no air resistance on the Moon.
(i) Complete Fig. 1.1 until t = 6.0 s. [1]
(ii) State the value of t when the stone is at its highest point.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/M/J/12

3
(b) Calculate the acceleration of the stone between t = 0 and t = 2.0 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(c) A stone is thrown vertically upwards on the Earth with the same initial velocity.
State two ways in which the velocity-time graph for this stone differs from Fig. 1.1.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a windsurfer, sail and board.
sail
windsurfer
board
Fig. 2.1
The total mass of the windsurfer, sail and board is 90 kg. They travel at a constant speed of
5.0 m / s.
(a) Calculate the total kinetic energy of the windsurfer, sail and board.
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The wind exerts a forward force on the sail.
(i) Explain, in terms of the forces acting, why the board travels at a constant speed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The wind does work on the sail. Explain, in terms of the conservation of energy, why the
total kinetic energy does not increase.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/M/J/12

5
3 A student measures the pressure inside a bicycle tyre using a pressure gauge he has constructed.
Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus he uses. The piston and rod move along the smooth cylindrical tube.
piston spring rod
to bicycle tyre
tube
Fig. 3.1
The change in length of the spring is proportional to the force applied to the spring. A force of 2.8 N
compresses the spring by 2.0 cm.
The student connects the pressure gauge to the tyre. Air from the tyre exerts a force on the piston.
As the piston moves, the spring is compressed. The piston moves 10 cm to the right and then
stops.
(a) Calculate the force exerted on the piston by the spring.
force = ...........................................................[1]
(b) The cross-sectional area of the piston is 3.0 × 10–5 m2. Calculate the pressure of the air inside
the tyre.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest one change to the apparatus so that the piston moves a smaller distance when
measuring the same pressure.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Each time that the pressure gauge is used, the pressure in the tyre falls slightly. The
temperature stays constant. Describe, using ideas about molecules, why the pressure falls.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

6
4 A student slowly heats a sample of solid wax in a test-tube.

Fig. 4.1 shows how the temperature of the wax varies with time t.
60
55
temperature 50
°C
45
40
35
0 2 4 6 8 10
t / min
Fig. 4.1
(a) State what is meant by the melting point of a substance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Thermal energy (heat) passes into the wax throughout the experiment.
(i) Describe what effect this energy has on the wax between t = 0 and t = 4 min.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe and explain what effect this energy has on the wax between t = 4 min and
t = 8 min.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The wax expands as the temperature rises. It expands more between t = 8 min and 9 min
than between t = 0 and 1 min. Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/M/J/12

7
5 Fig. 5.1 shows the electromagnetic spectrum.
gamma radio
P ultra-violet visible light Q microwaves
rays waves
shortest longest
wavelength wavelength
Fig. 5.1
Two components of the spectrum, P and Q, have not been named.
(a) State the name of
(i) component P,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) component Q.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) All electromagnetic waves have a wavelength and a frequency. They all have changing
magnetic and electric fields. State two other properties of all electromagnetic waves.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State the component of the electromagnetic spectrum used for satellite communication.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

8
6 A sound from an electronic organ is played into a microphone which is connected to a cathode-ray
oscilloscope (c.r.o.). Fig. 6.1 shows the trace on the c.r.o. produced by the sound.
0.020 s
Fig. 6.1
The horizontal line marked L is the trace seen when there is no sound.
(a) (i) State how Fig. 6.1 shows that the loudness of the sound decreases with time.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State how Fig. 6.1 shows that the pitch of the sound is constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) State what is meant by the frequency of a wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The time for one complete cycle of the wave in Fig. 6.1 is 0.020 s.
Calculate the frequency of the wave.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) Determine the time taken for the amplitude of the trace in Fig. 6.1 to decrease to half its
initial value.
time = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/M/J/12

9
7 Fig. 7.1 is the circuit diagram of a circuit set up by a student.
P
V
Fig. 7.1
The student uses three cells, each of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.5 V. The cells are connected in
series, as shown.
(a) State the name of component P.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State what is meant by the electromotive force of a cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The student expects the reading on the voltmeter to be 4.5 V. The actual reading is 0.2 V.
Suggest two reasons why the voltmeter reading is much less than 4.5 V.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) (i) In the space below, draw three cells connected in parallel.
[1]
(ii) State one advantage of connecting cells in parallel.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

10
8 (a) A magnet is placed on a bench, as shown in Fig. 8.1a. End P of a rod is held above each end
of the magnet in turn, as shown in Fig. 8.1b and in Fig. 8.1c. One end of the magnet is lifted
off the bench in both cases.
rod
P P
magnet
N S
N S S N
bench
Fig. 8.1a Fig. 8.1b Fig. 8.1c
(i) Suggest what material the rod is made from.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how the rod lifts each end of the magnet off the bench.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 8.2 and Fig. 8.3 show views of a wire carrying a current downwards through a horizontal
board.
current
current into
page
Fig. 8.2 Fig. 8.3 (viewed from above)
(i) On Fig. 8.3, draw the magnetic field due to the current in the wire. [2]
(ii) The magnetic field is stronger closer to the wire. State how the magnetic field lines
indicate that the field is stronger.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/M/J/12

11
Section B
9 Fig. 9.1a shows a room heater. Fig. 9.1b is a diagram of the electric circuit of the heater.
neutral live
switch A
switch B
Fig. 9.1a Fig. 9.1b
The fuse has not been drawn on the circuit diagram in Fig. 9.1b.
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.1b, draw the symbol for a fuse in the correct position. [2]
(ii) State the part of the room heater to which the earth wire is connected.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The earth wire reduces the chance of an electric shock if a fault develops in the room
heater.
1. State one fault that causes an electric shock when a person uses the room heater
without an earth connection.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Explain how using an earth connection prevents an electric shock.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[2]

12
(b) (i) This type of room heater is very efficient. Explain what this means.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The room heater is a convector heater. Describe and explain how thermal energy (heat)
passes around a room by convection.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows the power output of the room heater when each switch is closed.
power / W
switch A only closed 600
switch B only closed
both switches closed 2100
Fig. 9.2
(i) Determine the power output of the room heater when only switch B is closed.
power output = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) The room heater is used with both switches closed for 2.5 hours.
Calculate the energy output of the room heater
1. in kilowatt-hours,
energy = ................................................ kW h [2]
2. in joules.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/M/J/12

13
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the path of a ray of blue light as it passes through a glass prism.
45° A 61°
45° 29° B
air
glass
Fig. 10.1
(i) State the wave term used to describe what happens to the ray of light at A.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Using angles from Fig. 10.1, calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) Explain why the ray does not emerge from the prism at B.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iv) Fig. 10.2 shows a second, horizontal, ray of blue light striking the prism at point C.
On Fig. 10.2, continue the path of the second ray through and out of the glass prism. [2]
Fig. 10.2

14
(b) The camera lens shown in Fig. 10.3 is used to photograph the object O.
camera lens
Fig. 10.3 (full scale)
The object O is 2.0 cm high and is placed 8.0 cm from the centre of the lens. The lens has a
focal length of 3.0 cm.
(i) Draw rays on Fig. 10.3 to find the position and height of the image formed by the lens.
Label the image I. [3]
(ii) Determine the height of the image.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The image formed by the lens is a real image.

1. Explain the difference between a real image and a virtual image.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Explain how a converging lens is used to produce and view a virtual image.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/M/J/12

15
11 Fig. 11.1 shows part of a smoke detector.
positive
metal plate
+ + + + +
to
alpha- alarm
particles
radioactive
source – – – – –
negative
metal plate
Alpha-particles from the radioactive source ionise the air between the metal plates. There is then a
small current in the resistor. When smoke enters the detector, the current changes and the alarm
sounds.
(a) Explain why a source emitting only gamma-rays is unsuitable for use in the smoke detector.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) There is an electric field between the metal plates.
(i) On Fig. 11.1, draw the electric field between the plates. [3]
(ii) The alpha-particles in Fig. 11.1 are deflected slightly as they pass through the electric
field.
Explain why the alpha-particles are deflected and state the direction of the deflection.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State and explain how the path of gamma-rays differs from the path of alpha-particles as they
pass through an electric field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

16
(d) The source used is the radioactive isotope americium-241, which has a half-life of 500 years.
(i) A sample of americium-241 is left for 1500 years. Determine the fraction of the original
number of atoms of americium-241 left in the sample after this time.
fraction = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Another isotope of the same element, americium-242, has a half-life of 16 hours. Explain
why the half-life of americium-242 makes this isotope unsuitable for use in a smoke
detector.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Atoms of americium-241 and americium-242 contain protons, neutrons and electrons.
1. State two similarities in the structure of an atom of americium-241 and an atom of

americium-242.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[2]
2. Describe the difference between an atom of americium-241 and an atom of

americium-242.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/M/J/12

* 7 0 0 7 4 2 8 5 5 7 *
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
DC (LEO/SW) 42011/4
2
Section A
1 Fig. 1.1 shows apparatus used to obtain the readings for a graph of force against extension for a
spring.
spring
scale
masses
pan
Fig. 1.1
The masses added to the pan produce a force that stretches the spring.
(a) (i) State what is meant by the mass of a body.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe how the scale is used to find the extension of the spring.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/M/J/12

3
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the force-extension graphs for two different springs.
30
25 spring A
force / N
20 spring B
15
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
extension / cm
Fig. 1.2
(i) A student states that spring B is easier to stretch than spring A.
Use values from Fig. 1.2 to explain what the student means.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) When a force of 25 N is applied, spring B reaches its limit of proportionality but spring A
does not. Explain how Fig. 1.2 shows this.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The same force is applied to each spring.
Using Fig. 1.2, determine the force that produces an extension of spring B that is 1.0 cm
greater than the extension of spring A.
force = ................................................................[1]

4
2 (a) State what is meant by friction.
...................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows two horizontal forces that act on a car. Force B is caused by air resistance and
friction.
force B force A
Fig. 2.1
The car is travelling along a straight level road.
(i) The forward force A and the backward force B are equal.
Describe the motion of the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The mass of the car is 800 kg.

Force A increases to 5000 N. This causes the car to accelerate initially at 1.5 m / s2.
Calculate the size of force B.
force B = .............................................................[3]
(iii) Force A remains constant at 5000 N. Explain why the acceleration decreases as the car
travels along the level road.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A car of mass 800 kg climbs a hill and rises a vertical distance of 200 m.
Calculate the gain in potential energy of the car. (The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.)
gain in potential energy = ...................................[2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/M/J/12

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the plan of a bedroom and part of the main room of a house. Other rooms are not
shown.
main room 22 °C
outside of
house 32 °C
bedroom door
18 °C
window
Fig. 3.1
The temperatures of the main room, the bedroom and the outside of the house are shown on
Fig. 3.1.
Fig. 3.2 shows all the thermal energy (heat) inputs to the bedroom in one hour.
thermal energy input to bedroom
through door and walls from main room 50 000 J
through walls from outside of house 2 000 000 J
through window 1 000 000 J
from person sleeping in bedroom 250 000 J
Fig. 3.2
(a) Suggest why more thermal energy enters the bedroom from the outside of the house than
from the main room.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) An air conditioner keeps the temperature constant in the bedroom by removing thermal
energy.
(i) Calculate the total thermal energy that the air conditioner removes from the bedroom in
one hour.
thermal energy = ................................................[1]

6
(ii) The electrical power input to the air conditioner is 300 W.

Calculate the electrical energy input into the air conditioner in 1 hour.
energy = .............................................................[2]
(c) The air conditioner cools the air at the top of the room. This causes a convection current in
the room.
Explain how the cold air gives rise to the convection current.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/M/J/12

7
4 A beaker contains 60 g of a hot substance, initially in the liquid state. Fig. 4.1 shows how the
temperature of the substance changes with time t as it cools in a laboratory.
100
temperature
°C 90
A B
80
70
0 20 40 60 80 100
t /s
Fig. 4.1
(a) Use Fig. 4.1 to determine the melting point of the substance.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The specific heat capacity of the liquid is 1.7 J / (g °C). Calculate the loss of thermal energy
(heat) from the liquid between t = 0 and t = 20 s.
loss of thermal energy = .....................................[2]
(c) Between points A and B on Fig. 4.1, the temperature is constant as the substance changes
from liquid to solid.
(i) Explain why the temperature stays constant, even though thermal energy is lost by the
substance.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Describe the change in the arrangement of the molecules as the substance changes
from a liquid to a solid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
5 Optical fibres are used to transmit telephone signals. Fig. 5.1 shows a ray of light that strikes the
inside surface of an optical fibre at P.
Fig. 5.1
(a) State one advantage of using optical fibres to transmit telephone signals.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) On Fig. 5.1, draw a normal at P and mark the angle of incidence with the letter i. [1]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the ray at P. Use the term critical angle in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The optical fibre is made of glass of refractive index 1.5.

At the start of the optical fibre, the ray enters the glass from air.
The angle of incidence in the air is 60°.
Calculate the angle of refraction in the glass.
angle = ................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/M/J/12

9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a wave on the surface of water. The wave is travelling to the right.
(a) Describe what is meant by wave motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of the movement of a water molecule at X.
[1]
(c) The frequency of the water wave is 2.0 Hz and the wavelength is 2.5 cm.
(i) Calculate the speed of the wave.
speed = ...............................................................[2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, mark a distance which shows how far a wavefront at X moves in 1.0 s.
Label this distance D. [1]

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows two charged metal spheres.
One sphere has a positive charge and the other sphere has a negative charge.
+ + – –
+ –
+ + – –
+ –
+ + – –
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw the electric field between the two spheres. [2]
(b) The negative charge on the sphere is removed and a wire is used to connect the positive
sphere to earth. The charge on the positive sphere decreases from 4.8 × 10–9 C to zero in a
time of 2.0 × 10–6 s.
Calculate the average current in the wire.
current = .............................................................[2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/M/J/12

11
Section B
8 A student investigates how the resistance of a wire depends upon its length. The student uses
an ammeter, a voltmeter, a battery, a fixed resistor and the wire under test, all connected in an
electrical circuit.
(a) (i) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the apparatus. Label the wire under test
with the letter W.
[3]
(ii) Describe how the student obtains one complete set of results.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) During the experiment, the student keeps the temperature of the wire constant.
1. Suggest why it is sensible to keep the temperature of the wire constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Suggest how the student keeps the temperature of the wire constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

12
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows part of a circuit containing three resistors X, Y and Z.
0.20 A Y
0.30 A X 10 Ω
10 Ω I Z
Fig. 8.1
The resistance of X and the resistance of Y are each 10 Ω. The current through X is 0.30 A.
The current through Y is 0.20 A.
(i) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across Y.
p.d. = ...................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the current I in resistor Z.
I = .......................................................................[1]
(iii) Explain in words, rather than by calculation, how Fig. 8.1 shows that the resistance of Z
is larger than the resistance of Y. Use ideas about p.d. and current in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iv) Calculate the total resistance of the resistors X, Y and Z in this circuit.
resistance = ........................................................[3]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/M/J/12

13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows two coils of insulated wire wound on an iron ring. Coil A is connected to a battery
and a switch. The switch is open. Coil B is connected to a sensitive centre-zero voltmeter.
coil A iron ring
open
switch
centre-zero
voltmeter
coil B
Fig. 9.1
The switch is closed. There is a current in coil A.
(a) On Fig. 9.1,
(i) mark the direction of the current in coil A, [1]
(ii) draw the magnetic field lines produced in the iron ring. [3]
(b) As the switch is closed, the voltmeter deflects to the right and then returns to zero.
(i) Explain why there is a deflection on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The switch is opened. State and explain what happens to the deflection on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Without changing coil A, state two changes to the apparatus that cause a greater
deflection of the voltmeter.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
[2]

14
(c) The battery in Fig. 9.1 is replaced by an alternating current (a.c.) supply. The output from coil
B is used to power a lamp that is a long distance away. Each lead from coil B to the lamp has
a resistance of 2.5 Ω. These leads are represented by the two resistors shown in Fig. 9.2.
2.5 Ω
a.c.
output from
lamp
coil B
240 V, 1.6 A 2.5 Ω
Fig. 9.2
The output voltage of coil B is 240 V and the current in the circuit is 1.6 A.
(i) Calculate the electrical power produced by coil B.
power = ...............................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the total power loss in the leads to the lamp.
power loss = .......................................................[3]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/M/J/12

15
10 To find out whether a radioactive source emits alpha-particles, beta-particles or gamma-rays, the
source is placed in front of a radiation detector, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
radioactive
source
detector
absorbing
materials
Fig. 10.1
Different absorbing materials are placed between the source and the detector. The detector
measures the number of counts per minute.
(a) State what is meant by
(i) an alpha-particle,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) a gamma-ray.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) Suggest why, in this experiment,
1. the distance between the source and the detector is only a few centimetres,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
2. the half-life of the radioactive source is longer than a few minutes.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State one precaution taken when using a radioactive source.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

16
(c) Fig. 10.2 shows the results obtained.
source present material between source counts per minute

and detector
no none 10
yes none 1200
yes thin paper 820
yes 5 mm aluminium 820
Fig. 10.2
Using information from Fig. 10.2, state and explain whether the source emits
(i) alpha-particles,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) beta-particles,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) gamma-rays.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) There is a count recorded even when no source is present. This is caused by background
radiation.
State two sources of background radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Describe one effect on the human body of a very high level of radiation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/M/J/12

* 6 6 4 4 3 0 4 7 4 8 *
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Section A
Section B
Electronic calculators may be used.

DC (SJF/CGW) 58175/4
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 Fig. 1.1 shows how the length of a spring varies as the force applied to it increases.
2.0
force / N
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
length of spring / cm
Fig. 1.1
(a) Determine the length of the unstretched spring.
length = ................................................... [1]
(b) Explain how the graph shows that the limit of proportionality is not reached.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/M/J/13

3
(c) The spring is attached to a mass M of 0.20 kg and placed on a frictionless surface, as For
shown in Fig. 1.2. Examiner’s
Use
M spring car accelerates in

this direction
frictionless
surface
The apparatus is placed on the floor of a car.
When the car accelerates uniformly in the direction shown, the spring extends.
(i) State what is meant by a uniform acceleration.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The extension of the spring is 9.0 cm.

Using Fig. 1.1, determine
1. the horizontal force on M,
force = .................................................. [1]
2. the acceleration of M.
acceleration = .................................................. [2]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows apparatus used to investigate the turning effect of a force. For
Examiner’s
Use
newton meter
pivot uniform metre rule

20 cm
40 cm
4.0 N
Fig. 2.1
The uniform metre rule is freely pivoted at its centre.
The newton meter is 20 cm from the pivot and a 4.0 N weight is 40 cm from the pivot.
The metre rule is in equilibrium.
(a) State the principle of moments for a body in equilibrium.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the reading on the newton meter.
reading = .................................................. [2]
(c) The weight of the metre rule is 1.2 N.
Calculate the size of the force exerted on the metre rule by the pivot.
force = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/M/J/13

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a glass tube dipped into mercury. A vacuum pump is connected to the top of For
the tube and switched on. The mercury rises up the tube and stops. Examiner’s
Use
to vacuum
pump
P
glass tube
0.76 m
Q R
mercury
Fig. 3.1
(a) Three points on Fig. 3.1 are labelled P, Q and R.
State which two of these points are at atmospheric pressure.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The density of mercury is 13 600 kg / m3 and the gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
Calculate the pressure due to the column of mercury of length 0.76 m.
pressure = .................................................. [2]
(c) State and explain what happens if the mercury in the apparatus shown in Fig. 3.1 is
replaced with water.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a laboratory thermometer. For

Examiner’s
Use
& 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
liquid
Fig. 4.1
(i) State the range of the thermometer shown in Fig. 4.1.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Describe how Fig. 4.1 shows that the thermometer has a linear scale.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) The manufacturer of the thermometer changes the design to make a more sensitive
thermometer.
Fig. 4.2 shows part of the scale on the original thermometer.
On Fig. 4.3, draw a more sensitive scale.
part of the scale

on the original
thermometer
Fig. 4.2
your scale showing

a more sensitive
thermometer
Fig. 4.3 [1]
(b) State one other property, apart from volume or expansion, which can be used to
measure temperature.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/M/J/13

7
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a ray of light that enters a semicircular glass block at A. For
At B, some of the light is reflected and some light leaves the glass and travels along the Examiner’s
surface. Use
0.10 m
41°
glass block
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the name of the angle of incidence marked 41°.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Rays of light are incident at B with different angles of incidence.
(i) On Fig. 5.2a, the angle i1 is less than 41°.

Draw the path taken by the ray of light after B.
(ii) On Fig. 5.2b, the angle i2 is greater than 41°.

Draw the path taken by the ray of light after B.
B B
i1 i2
Fig. 5.2a Fig. 5.2b [2]
(c) The speed of light in the glass block is 2.0 × 108 m / s.

The diameter of the glass block is 0.10 m.
Calculate the time taken for the light to travel from A to B.
time = .................................................. [2]

8
6 Fig. 6.1 is a graph of current against potential difference (p.d.) for a length of metal wire. For
Examiner’s
Use
0.3
current / A
0.2
0.1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
p.d. / V
Fig. 6.1
(a) The metal wire obeys Ohm’s law. State Ohm’s law in words.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the resistance of the metal wire.
resistance = .................................................. [2]
(c) A new wire is made from the same metal as the original wire. The two wires have the
same length. The cross-sectional area of the new wire is half that of the original wire.
(i) Calculate the resistance of the new wire.
resistance = .................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, draw a line to show how current varies with p.d. for the new wire. [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/M/J/13

9
7 A student connects a thermistor in series with a power supply and a fixed resistor. For
Examiner’s
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the apparatus. Use
[2]
(b) Values for potential difference (p.d.) and current are given in Fig. 7.1.
p.d. across the p.d. across the e.m.f. of power current in the current in the
thermistor / V fixed resistor / V supply / V thermistor / A fixed resistor / A
8.0 4.0 0.018
Fig. 7.1
The maximum power rating of the thermistor is 150 mW.
(i) In the blank spaces in Fig. 7.1, insert the values of the electromotive force (e.m.f.)
of the power supply and the current in the fixed resistor. [2]
(ii) Calculate the power produced in the thermistor.
power = .................................................. [2]
(iii) The e.m.f. of the power supply is doubled. Describe what happens to the thermistor.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

10
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a simple transformer. For

Examiner’s
Use
core
alternating
current
supply
primary coil secondary coil
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the metal used for the core of a transformer.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain how an alternating current in the primary coil causes the lamp to light.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Transformers are used to produce high voltages for the transmission of electrical power
over long distances.
State one advantage of high voltage transmission.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/M/J/13

11
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a conveyor belt carrying suitcases into an aeroplane.
aeroplane
suitcase
9.0 m
conveyor
belt
6.0 m
motor
An electric motor drives the conveyor belt.
(a) A suitcase of mass 20 kg is lifted from the ground into the aeroplane.
(i) Explain what is meant by mass and by weight.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.

Calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy of the suitcase.
increase in potential energy = .................................................. [2]
(iii) The suitcase takes 12 s to travel 9.0 m along the conveyor belt.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the suitcase.
kinetic energy = .................................................. [3]

12
(iv) The electric motor is powered by an input voltage of 230 V and a current of 1.5 A. For
Calculate the electrical energy input to the motor in 12 s. Examiner’s
Use
energy = .................................................. [2]
(v) 1. State the principle of the conservation of energy.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. Explain how this principle applies to the lifting of the suitcases into the
aeroplane.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Some of the electrical energy for the motor comes from renewable energy sources.
(i) Explain what is meant by a renewable energy source.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State two renewable energy sources.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/M/J/13

13
10 (a) The average input power to a freezer is 80 W. The cost of 1 kW h is 25 cents. For
Examiner’s
(i) Explain what is meant by the kilowatt-hour (kW h). Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Calculate the cost of running the freezer for one week.
cost = .................................................. [3]
(b) A large jug containing 1.5 kg of water is placed in the freezer.
(i) The water cools from 25 °C to 0 °C in a time of 60 minutes. The specific heat
capacity of water is 4.2 J / (g °C).
Calculate the thermal energy (heat) removed from the water as it cools from 25 °C
to 0 °C.
energy removed = .................................................. [3]
(ii) After the water has reached 0 °C, thermal energy is removed from the water at the
same rate as in (i).
The specific latent heat of fusion of water is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate the mass of water at 0 °C that becomes ice in 60 minutes.
mass = ................................................ [2]

14
(iii) Describe the arrangement and the movement of the molecules For
Examiner’s
1. in liquid water, Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. in ice.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iv) Ice at 0 °C becomes water at 0 °C.

State what, if anything, happens to the kinetic energy and the potential energy of
the molecules as this happens.
kinetic energy: ..........................................................................................................
potential energy: .......................................................................................................

[1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/M/J/13

15
11 (a) The nucleus of an atom of carbon-14 is represented as 146 C. For

Examiner’s
(i) Describe the structure of an atom of carbon-14. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) Carbon has several isotopes.

Describe, in terms of the particles within the nucleus, how isotopes are
1. different from one another,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. the same as one another.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Carbon-14 decays by beta emission to a stable isotope of nitrogen.
Carbon-14 has a half-life of 5700 years and is used to find the age of objects by carbon
dating.
(i) A pure sample of carbon-14 initially contains 8.0 × 1020 atoms.

Calculate the number of atoms of carbon and of nitrogen present in the sample
after 11 400 years.
number of atoms of carbon = ......................................................
number of atoms of nitrogen = ......................................................

[3]
(ii) Explain why carbon-14 is not used to find the age of a piece of coal that has been
in the ground for millions of years.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

16
(c) A teacher sets up the apparatus shown in Fig. 11.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
lead
radioactive
source emitting
beta-particles detector counter
6 mm
Fig. 11.1
The teacher also has available a number of sheets of aluminium, each of which is 1 mm
thick.
(i) Describe how the apparatus and the sheets are used to demonstrate that beta-
particles are stopped by 5 mm of aluminium.
In your account, make clear how the background count is measured and used.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [4]
(ii) Suggest why the lead in Fig. 11.1 is placed around the radioactive source during
the demonstration.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) The radioactive source in Fig. 11.1 is changed for one that emits gamma-rays.
Describe why the apparatus cannot be used to find the thickness of aluminium
needed to stop gamma-rays.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/M/J/13

* 0 4 9 9 5 2 8 3 8 9 *
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Answer all questions. Question 8 has a choice of parts to answer.
Section B

DC (NF/CGW) 58173/4
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
Answer only one of the two alternative parts in Question 8.
1 A ball rolls down a slope, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
The metre rule shows the position of the ball at times t = 0, 1.0 s, 2.0 s and 3.0 s.
t=0
ball t = 1.0 s
t = 2.0 s
slope
10
20
30 t = 3.0 s
40
50
60
metre rule 70
80
90
cm
Fig. 1.1
(a) Explain how Fig. 1.1 shows that the ball is accelerating.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the average speed of the ball between t = 1.0 s and 3.0 s.
average speed = .................................................. [2]
(c) Two of the forces that act on the ball are air resistance and weight.
State what, if anything, happens to these forces as the ball accelerates.
air resistance: ..................................................................................................................
weight: ..............................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Explain why, if the slope is long enough, the ball eventually reaches a constant speed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13
3
2 (a) Explain what is meant by the moment of a force. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a system for raising a heavy piece of metal into a vertical position.
T
rope
piece of
metal
8.0 m
2000 N
A
2.0 m
A man pulls on the rope with a horizontal force T. The piece of metal has a weight of
2000 N and is freely pivoted at A. The system is in equilibrium.
(i) By taking moments about A, calculate T.
T = .................................................. [2]
(ii) The force T and the force that the rope exerts on the man are related by Newton’s
third law. State the relationship between these forces.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a man using a chest expander to increase the strength of his arms. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 3.1
The chest expander may be considered to be a single spring.
Fig. 3.2 shows the force needed to produce different extensions of the spring.
force / N extension / cm
0 0
60 10
120 20
180 30
Fig. 3.2
(a) The man increases the force on the spring from 0 to 180 N.
The spring extends by 30 cm and the average force exerted during this process is 90 N.
(i) Calculate the work done on the spring.
work = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Twenty extensions are made in 1.0 minute.
Calculate the power used to extend the spring.
power = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13

5
(b) The force at the limit of proportionality of the spring is 800 N. For
Examiner’s
(i) Calculate the extension of the spring when the force is 800 N. Use
extension = .................................................. [2]
(ii) The force on the spring is increased from 800 N to 860 N.
Suggest what happens to the extension.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

6
4 (a) The list below contains three components of the electromagnetic spectrum. For
Examiner’s
infra-red gamma rays visible light Use
Arrange the components in order of increasing wavelength.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Satellites are used in the transmission of some television signals.
Fig. 4.1 shows a satellite above the television station where a television signal is
generated.
satellite
television
station
(i) State which component of the electromagnetic spectrum is used to transmit the
television signal to the satellite.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain how the satellite is used.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Suggest one advantage of using a satellite to transmit television signals.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13

7
5 A student rubs a polythene rod with a dry cloth. The polythene rod becomes negatively For
charged and the cloth becomes positively charged. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Describe, in terms of the movement of electrons, what happens during the charging
process.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) There is an electric field around the charged rod.
Explain what is meant by an electric field.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The charged rod is placed near a stream of water from a tap, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
tap
Fig. 5.1
The stream of water bends because the rod is charged.
(i) Explain how the charge on the rod causes positive and negative particles in the
water to move.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, draw the charge present on the stream of water. [1]

8
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the current-voltage graph for a filament lamp. For
Examiner’s
Use
0.4
current / A
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
voltage / V
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State the range of voltages where the resistance increases.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State why the resistance of the lamp increases as the voltage increases.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13

9
(b) The filament lamp is connected in the circuit shown in Fig. 6.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
A
6.0 V 20 1
Fig. 6.2
There are currents in the lamp, the 20 Ω resistor and the ammeter.
(i) State what is meant by an electric current.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 6.1 to determine the current in the filament lamp.
current = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Determine the current in the ammeter.
current = .................................................. [3]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13

11
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a view, from above, of two wires X and Y. These wires carry equal currents For
vertically downwards through a piece of card. Examiner’s
Use
card
wire X
wire Y
A B
magnetic
field line
Fig. 7.1
One complete magnetic field line is drawn around each wire.
In this question, ignore the effects of the Earth’s magnetic field.
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw the complete magnetic field line due to the current in wire X that
passes through point A.
Mark the direction of this field line. [2]
(b) Point B is midway between the two wires. Explain why the magnetic field at B is zero.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) There is a force on wire Y due to the current in wire X.
(i) State the direction of the force on wire Y.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why there is a force on wire Y.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
8 EITHER For
Examiner’s
Fig. 8.1 shows a simple a.c. generator. The coil is turning and an e.m.f. is induced in the coil. Use
D[LV
FRLO
1 6
VOLSULQJ
RXWSXW
Fig. 8.1
(a) The generator contains a permanent magnet. State the name of a metal used in a
permanent magnet.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) At the instant shown in Fig. 8.1, the induced e.m.f. is a maximum.
(i) Explain why the induced e.m.f. is a maximum.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) State the position of the coil where there is no induced e.m.f.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13

13
OR For
Examiner’s
Fig. 8.2 shows an astable circuit (pulse generator) that contains two capacitors C1 and C2, Use
two resistors R1 and R2, and two components labelled Y.
C2 Y output C1 Y output 1 1
P Q
0 0
R2 R1
0V
Fig. 8.2
(a) State the name of component Y.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Complete Fig. 8.3 to show the truth table for component Y.
A high voltage is shown as 1 and a low voltage as 0.
input output
1
[1]
Fig. 8.3
(c) The astable circuit produces a series of pulses at output Q.
(i) At one instant, capacitor C1 is uncharged, output P is 1 and output Q is 0.
Describe how the voltage across resistor R1 changes until Q becomes 1.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Describe one change to the circuit that increases the frequency of the astable
circuit.
............................................................................................................................. [1]

14
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a flask, partly full of a liquid and partly full of air.
tube
X
air
0.15 m
liquid
flask Y
Fig. 9.1
When the flask is heated, the pressure of the air inside the flask increases and the liquid
rises up the tube.
(a) Explain, using ideas about molecules, why heating the air inside the flask causes the
pressure to increase.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A teacher uses the flask as a thermometer. He marks the liquid level at 0 °C and at
100 °C.
(i) Describe how the teacher obtains these temperatures.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) State two ways in which the thermometer can be made more sensitive.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13
15
(iii) The thermometer has a non-linear scale. For

Examiner’s
Explain what is meant by a non-linear scale on a thermometer. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The inner cross-sectional area of the tube is 5.0 × 10–5 m2.
The density of liquid in the tube is 1200 kg / m3.
The distance between X and Y is 0.15 m.
The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
Calculate
(i) the mass of liquid in the tube,
mass = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the weight of liquid in the tube,
weight = .................................................. [1]
(iii) the pressure at the bottom of the tube caused by the liquid column between X
and Y.
pressure = .................................................. [2]
(d) When the flask is completely full of liquid, the liquid moves up the tube a smaller distance
for the same temperature rise. State why.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

16
10 A student traces the path of a ray of blue light as it enters and as it leaves a glass prism. For
Fig. 10.1 shows the trace obtained by the student. Examiner’s
Use
blue B C
light
Fig. 10.1
(a) On Fig. 10.1, draw and label, at the point B, the normal, the angle of incidence i and the
angle of refraction r. [3]
(b) State, in terms of the properties of light waves, why the light refracts at B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The angle of incidence for the ray of blue light at B is 45°. The refractive index of the
glass is 1.5. Calculate the angle of refraction at B.
angle of refraction = .................................................. [3]
(d) The student performs another experiment with a ray of red light along the line AB.
On Fig. 10.1, show the path taken by this ray of light as it passes through and leaves the
prism. [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13

17
(e) The student performs another experiment with a semicircular glass block and a ray of For
white light. Fig. 10.2 shows the path taken by this ray of light as it enters the glass at P Examiner’s
until it hits the straight edge at Q. Use
semicircular
glass block
Ƨ
P
white light
Fig. 10.2
The student finds that there is no change in direction as the ray enters the glass at P
and that no light passes out of the glass at Q.
(i) Explain why the ray does not change direction at P.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why no light passes out of the glass at Q.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) On Fig. 10.2, draw the complete path followed by this ray. [1]
(iv) The student directs the ray of white light into the glass along different paths, so that
the angle θ is slowly reduced.
Describe what happens to the ray at Q.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

18
11 A student places a small electrical heater inside a cup of water, as shown in Fig. 11.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
cup
electrical
water heater
Fig. 11.1
The student determines the electrical power of the heater.
(a) In the space above the cup on Fig. 11.1, draw the electrical circuit that the student uses.
Include an ammeter, a voltmeter and a power supply. [2]
(b) The voltage of the power supply is 12 V and the current is 4.2 A.
(i) Calculate the electrical power input to the heater.
power = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Calculate the energy input to the heater in 8.0 minutes. Give your answer in kW h.
energy = ........................................ kW h [3]

© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13
19
(c) During heating, the student notices that some of the water evaporates from the cup. For
Examiner’s
(i) Describe, using ideas about molecules of water, what happens during evaporation. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The student finds that the amount of evaporation increases when the temperature
of the water is higher.
State and explain one other change that increases the amount of evaporation.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) State two differences between evaporation and boiling.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The student turns off the power supply and the water cools.
Describe and explain how convection in the air causes the water to cool.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/M/J/13

Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge Ordinary Level
* 1 2 9 8 4 5 9 5 3 1 *
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Section A
Section B

DC (HB (EL/CGW)) 75078/2

2
Section A
1 A small boat travels with a velocity of 4.0 m / s due north in an area of still water.
(a) State what is meant by velocity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The boat travels from the area of still water into an area where the velocity of the water is
2.0 m / s towards the north-east, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
( YHORFLW\

RIZDWHU
PV
YHORFLW\RI
ERDWLQVWLOO
ZDWHU
PV
VWLOO
ZDWHU
Combining the initial velocity of the boat with the velocity of the water gives the resultant
velocity of the boat.
In the space on the page opposite, draw a vector diagram to show the resultant velocity.
Use your diagram to find the size and direction of the resultant velocity.
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

3
size of resultant velocity = ...............................................................
direction of resultant velocity = ...............................................................

[4]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows apparatus used when determining the specific heat capacity of aluminium.
power meter 1
supply
meter 2
thermometer
electrical heater
aluminium block
Fig. 2.1
Meter 1 and meter 2 are electrical meters.
(a) State the quantities measured by meter 1 and by meter 2.
meter 1: .....................................................................................................................................
meter 2: .....................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) The following results are obtained in the experiment:
initial temperature of block = 18 °C

final temperature of block = 40 °C
mass of block = 0.85 kg
energy supplied to heater = 17 000 J
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

5
Assuming that no heat is lost from the block during the experiment, calculate the specific heat
capacity of aluminium.
specific heat capacity = .......................................................... [2]
(c) In practice, some heat is lost from the block and the air above it becomes hot.
(i) Describe and explain the process by which the hot air moves away from the block.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest how to reduce the loss of heat from the block in the experiment.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
3 A collector views a postage stamp of height 1.5 cm through a lens. The lens is 2.0 cm from the
stamp. The image has a linear magnification of 3.0.
The stamp, the image of the stamp and the position of the lens are shown full scale in Fig. 3.1.
image
viewed
from this
side of the
lens
image of stamp
stamp
1 cm
position
of lens
A ray of light from the top of the stamp to the lens is shown on Fig. 3.1.
(a) State the type of lens used.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State what is meant by linear magnification.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) (i) On Fig. 3.1, complete the path of the ray from the top of the stamp after it passes through
the lens. [1]
(ii) Use your drawing to determine the focal length of the lens.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) On Fig. 3.1, draw two additional rays from the top of the stamp to show how the image is
formed. [1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

7
4 A teacher demonstrates magnetic screening. When a magnet is placed near a small cardboard
box, paper clips on the other side of the box are picked up, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
When a small piece of soft iron is placed inside the box as shown in Fig. 4.2, the paper clips fall off.
Magnetic field lines in each diagram are shown as thin lines.
PDJQHW
1 6 1 6
FDUGERDUG
ER[
VRIWLURQ
PDJQHWLF
ILHOGOLQH
SDSHUFOLS
Fig. 4.1 Fig. 4.2
(a) On Fig. 4.1, mark an arrow on each of the magnetic field lines to show its direction. [1]
(b) Explain why placing the soft iron inside the box causes the paper clips to fall off.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Explain why it is sensible to have magnetic screening around the tube of a cathode-ray
oscilloscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

8
5 A positively charged sphere C is brought close to a small, uncharged metal sphere U. Sphere U is
suspended from an insulating thread, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
insulating thread
C
U
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw the induced charges on sphere U. [1]
(b) Sphere C is moved towards sphere U until the spheres touch. Sphere U is then repelled by
sphere C, as shown in Fig. 5.2. The charges on C and U are not shown.
&
8
Fig. 5.2
(i) State and explain what happens to the charge on the two spheres as they touch.
charge on C: ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
charge on U: ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Explain why U is repelled by C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14
9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a coil of wire connected by flexible leads to a switch and a battery.
FRLO
1
IOH[LEOH
OHDG 6
IOH[LEOH
D[LV OHDG

VZLWFK ²
EDWWHU\
Fig. 6.1
The coil is placed between the poles of a permanent magnet and is free to turn about the axis.
When the switch is closed, forces due to the current act on the sides of the coil. The coil starts to
turn.
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw arrows to show the directions of the forces. [2]
(b) The coil stops when it is vertical. Explain why the turning effect of the forces is zero at this
position.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) In order for the coil to rotate continuously, a split-ring commutator is connected between the
battery and the coil.
Explain how the split-ring commutator enables the coil to rotate continuously. Include a
diagram in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a variable potential divider (potentiometer) connected to a 6.0 V battery.
A movable
contact
6.0 V
output
B voltage
Fig. 7.1
The movable contact can slide between A and B. As it moves, the output voltage changes.
Complete the table below to show the output voltage when the contact is at A and at B.
position of movable contact A B

output voltage
[2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a thermistor in a potential divider circuit that is used to monitor temperature.
The fixed resistor has a resistance of 2000 Ω.
6.0 V
A
thermistor 2000 1
Fig. 7.2
(i) Explain why the voltage across the thermistor decreases as its temperature rises.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) At one temperature, the thermistor has a resistance of 1000 Ω. Calculate the current in
the thermistor.
current = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

11
8 A hospital laboratory uses a small sample of a radioactive isotope of iodine, 13513 I.
(a) (i) Describe the structure of the nucleus of an atom of this isotope.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The sample is radioactive. Describe what happens in radioactive decay.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The count in one minute from the source is measured several times. Fig. 8.1 shows the
readings obtained.
2686 2759 2847 2799
Fig. 8.1
(i) Suggest why the readings are different.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) 53I is 8.0 days. Estimate the count in one minute obtained from the
The half-life of 131
sample after 24 days.
count = .......................................................... [2]

12
Section B
9 A garden pond contains a small fountain. An electric pump in the water causes the water to rise
above the surface of the pond, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
ZDWHUIRXQWDLQ
SRQG
ZDWHULQOHW
SLSH
HOHFWULF
SXPS
Fig. 9.1
(a) The pressure of the water in the pond increases with depth.
(i) Explain what is meant by pressure.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the pressure below the surface of the water increases with depth.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State the unit of pressure.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe the energy changes that occur within the pump.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

13
(c) A volume of 0.78 m3 of water passes through the pump in one hour. The density of water is
1000 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the mass of water that passes through the pump in one hour.
mass = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) The water rises 1.5 m. The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
Calculate the useful work done in one hour raising the water to the top of the fountain.
work done = .......................................................... [2]
(iii) Calculate the minimum power output of the pump.
power = .......................................................... [2]
(d) Describe an experiment to check that the density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

14
10 A sound wave travels through air.
(a) Explain what is meant by the wavelength of a wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 10.1 represents air molecules in the sound wave at one instant.
A B
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe the motion of a molecule of air due to the sound.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State one difference between the motion of molecule A and the motion of molecule B.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Describe an experiment that shows that a medium is needed to transmit sound waves. Draw
a labelled diagram of the apparatus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

15
(d) A short pulse of sound waves produces an echo from a wall 20 m away. The echo arrives back
at the source of the sound 0.12 s after the pulse is produced.
The wavelength of the sound wave is 30 mm.
(i) State what is meant by an echo.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the speed of the sound.
speed = .......................................................... [2]
(iii) Calculate the frequency of the sound.
frequency = .......................................................... [3]
(iv) The sound wave produces compressions and rarefactions in the air as it passes.
Calculate the distance between a compression and the nearest rarefaction.
distance = .......................................................... [1]

16
11 (a) A torch contains a filament lamp connected to a battery. The battery contains four 1.5 V cells
connected in series.
Fig. 11.1 shows the current/potential difference (voltage) graph for the filament lamp.
400
current / mA
300
200
100
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
potential difference / V
Fig. 11.1
(i) State what is meant by the potential difference (p.d.) across the lamp.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Fig. 11.1 shows that the current in the lamp is not proportional to the p.d.
1. State how Fig. 11.1 shows this.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. Suggest why the current is not proportional to the p.d.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

17
(iii) The lamp is at normal brightness and there is a p.d. of 6.0 V across the lamp.
1. Use Fig. 11.1 to find the current in the lamp.
current = .......................................................... [1]
2. Calculate the charge that passes through the lamp in 2.0 hours.
charge = .......................................................... [2]
3. The battery in the torch is able to keep the lamp lit for 2.0 hours.
Estimate the initial energy stored in the battery.
energy = .......................................................... [2]
4. Explain why your value is only an estimate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Suggest and explain an advantage of using two cells in parallel rather than a single cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Another torch contains a light-emitting diode (LED) instead of a filament lamp.
The battery in the torch uses four 1.5 V cells, some in series and some in parallel.
The p.d. across the LED when in operation is 3.0 V.
In the space below, draw a circuit diagram showing how the four cells, a switch and the LED
are connected.
[3]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

20
BLANK PAGE
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/M/J/14

* 3 4 8 7 0 4 1 4 5 6 *
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B

DC (HB (EL/SW)) 75077/2

2
Section A
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a lorry accelerating in a straight line along a horizontal road.
Fig. 1.1
(a) The driving force on the lorry in the forward direction is D and the total backward force on the
lorry is B.
(i) State and explain whether D or B is the larger force.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest one possible cause of the backward force B.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The weight of the lorry is 300 000 N.
(i) Calculate the mass of the lorry.
mass = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) The resultant force on the lorry is 15 000 N. Calculate the acceleration of the lorry.
acceleration = .......................................................... [2]
(c) Later, the lorry turns a corner at constant speed.
Explain why the lorry accelerates even though the speed is constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/M/J/14

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows part of a hydraulic jack used to lift the front of a car.
force exerted
by operator
front of oil
car large small
handle
cylinder piston piston
pivot
arm pivot
The operator pulls the handle and causes a force of 50 N to act on the small piston. The force
exerted by the oil on the large piston increases by F. The large piston moves and rotates the arm
about the pivot. This raises the front of the car.
The cross-sectional area of the small piston is 1.5 cm2.

The cross-sectional area of the large piston is 5.0 cm2.
(a) Calculate
(i) the pressure in the oil caused by the force on the small piston,
pressure = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the value of F.
F = .......................................................... [1]
(b) Explain why the large piston moves through a shorter distance than the small piston.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The efficiency of the jack is 75%. Explain what is meant by efficiency.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

4
3 Most substances expand when they are heated.
(a) (i) State one example where expansion is useful.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one example where expansion causes a problem.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain, using ideas about molecules, why solids expand when heated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) When equal volumes are heated through the same temperature rise, the expansions of solids,
liquids and gases are different.
Complete each of the two sentences using one of these expressions:
much larger slightly larger much smaller slightly smaller
1. The expansion of a solid is ................................................ than the expansion of a liquid.
2. The expansion of a gas is ................................................ than the expansion of a liquid.

[2]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/M/J/14

5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows part of a long rope used by a student to show a transverse wave.
Fig. 4.1
(a) On Fig. 4.1,
(i) mark the direction of movement of the student’s hand, [1]
(ii) mark and label the wavelength λ of the wave, [1]
(iii) mark and label the amplitude A of the wave. [1]
(b) Describe how the frequency of the wave is found using a stopwatch.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Using the same rope, the student produces a wave of a longer wavelength than that shown in
Fig. 4.1.
State how the student does this.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

6
5 Visible light, radio waves, X-rays, gamma rays and microwaves are some of the components of the
(a) State two other components of the electromagnetic spectrum.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) White light is a mixture of different colours.
Fig. 5.1 shows a ray of white light entering a glass prism.
The white light separates into a number of colours. Only the blue light and the red light are
shown.
glass
prism
white red
blue
Fig. 5.1
Explain why the blue light and the red light separate as shown.
Use the term refractive index in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/M/J/14

7
6 (a) A beam of parallel light strikes a converging lens of focal length 2.8 cm.
The width of the beam before it reaches the lens is 1.0 cm. The width changes on the other
side of the lens.
State a distance from the lens where the width of the beam is
(i) less than 1.0 cm,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) more than 1.0 cm.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An object is placed 3.0 cm from a converging lens of focal length of 2.8 cm. Fig. 6.1 is an
incomplete, full-scale ray diagram for this arrangement.
lens
object
1 cm
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw the paths of the two rays after they pass through the lens. [2]
(ii) Explain how your ray diagram shows that the image is more than 11 cm from the lens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Underline three of the following words which describe the image.
diminished inverted magnified real upright virtual [1]

8
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a compass needle near a bar magnet. Magnetic poles are shown on the compass
needle and on the magnet.
A finger stops the compass needle from turning.
N
pivot
compass S
needle
bar
magnet
S N
(a) (i) The magnet causes a force on the S-pole of the compass needle.
On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow from the S-pole of the compass needle to show the direction
of this force. [1]
(ii) Explain why the compass needle turns when the finger is removed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A small compass is used to plot the magnetic field lines of the magnet.
Describe how the compass is used to plot magnetic field lines on a piece of paper.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/M/J/14

9
8 (a) An atom consists of electrons surrounding a nucleus made up of protons and neutrons.
State which of these particles
(i) have an equal and opposite charge,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) have almost equal mass.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
14
(b) The nuclide notation for carbon-14 is 6C. Carbon-14 decays by beta emission to a stable
isotope of nitrogen (N).
(i) Write numbers in the empty boxes below to show the nuclide notation for this isotope of
nitrogen.
14
6C N+β
[2]
(ii) The half-life of carbon-14 is 5700 years.

A sample of wood from a living tree contains 2.4 × 1012 atoms of carbon-14.
A similar sample of the same size is taken from an old piece of wood. It contains
6.0 × 1011 atoms of carbon-14.
Calculate the age of the old piece of wood.
age = .......................................................... [2]

10
Section B
9 A children’s ride consists of a steel cable that runs between two posts of different heights, as
shown in Fig. 9.1.
wheel
steel cable
post
Fig. 9.1
A girl starts and finishes the ride at rest. Her horizontal motion can be taken as
• an initial uniform acceleration for 3.0 s, followed by
• a constant speed of 2.4 m / s for a further 5.0 s and
• a final uniform deceleration that lasts for 1.0 s.
(a) On Fig. 9.2, draw a speed-time graph of the horizontal motion.
speed
m/s
0
0
time / s
Fig. 9.2 [3]
(b) Explain what is meant by uniform acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/M/J/14

11
(c) The final deceleration is larger in size than the initial acceleration.
Explain how the data shows this.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Calculate the horizontal distance travelled by the girl in the first 8.0 s.
distance = .......................................................... [3]
(e) (i) The girl has a mass of 30 kg and falls a vertical distance of 1.6 m during the ride.
Calculate the decrease in gravitational potential energy of the girl.
decrease in potential energy = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) The gain in kinetic energy of the girl is less than the decrease in her potential energy.
Suggest one reason for this.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) A group of pupils make measurements to show that the girl’s speed is constant during the
middle section of the ride.
Suggest what measurements are made and how they show that the speed is constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

12
10 Two metal saucepans contain the same mass of hot water at the same initial temperature.
Pan A is white and pan B is black, but otherwise the two saucepans are identical.
Both saucepans are uncovered and cool under the same conditions.
The cooling curves for the two saucepans are shown in Fig. 10.1.
100
temperature / °C
80
60 pan A (white)
40 pan B (black)
20
0 2 4 6 8
time / minutes
Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe how the water in a pan loses heat by
(i) conduction,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) convection.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) Explain why pan B cools faster than pan A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/M/J/14

13
(ii) Describe and explain how Fig. 10.1 is different when the pans are covered and the
experiment is repeated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
(i) Explain what is meant by specific heat capacity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The specific heat capacity of water is very high. Suggest one disadvantage of this when
water is used for cooking.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The water in pan A cools for 8 minutes, as shown in Fig. 10.1. During this time, the water
loses an average of 9000 J of thermal energy per minute.
1. Calculate the mass of water in pan A.
mass = .......................................................... [3]
2. The mass of water in pan B is the same as that in pan A.
Calculate the thermal energy lost from the water in pan B during the 8 minutes.
loss of thermal energy = .......................................................... [2]

14
11 A student sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 11.1.
18 V movable
contact
50 1
filament
lamp
Fig. 11.1
R is a fixed resistor in the circuit. The filament lamp is marked 12 V, 0.25 A.
The circuit is used to produce a current/voltage graph for the filament lamp. The ammeter and
voltmeter needed are not shown.
To obtain different readings, the student changes the position of the movable contact.
(a) On Fig. 11.1, draw the symbols for an ammeter and a voltmeter in the correct positions. [3]
(b) Explain why it is sensible to include the resistor R in this circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) (i) On Fig. 11.2, sketch a current/voltage graph for the lamp.
0.25
current / A
0
0 4 8 12
voltage / V
Fig. 11.2 [3]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/M/J/14

15
(ii) State and explain how a current/voltage graph for a fixed resistor is different from the
graph for a filament lamp.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Fig. 11.3 shows the position of the movable contact when the voltage across the lamp is 12 V
and the current in the lamp is 0.25 A.
18 V
50 1
12 V, 0.25 A
Fig. 11.3
Determine
(i) the current in the 50 Ω resistor,
current = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the current in R,
current = .......................................................... [1]
(iii) the potential difference (p.d.) across R,
p.d. = .......................................................... [1]
(iv) the resistance of R.
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/M/J/14

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/M/J/14


PHYSICS 5054/02
Paper 2 Theory
October/November 2004
1 hour 45 minutes
Additional Materials: answer paper.
Section A
Section B
provided.
Section A
details. If any details are incorrect or Q8

provided.
Total

SP (NH/CG) S65278/4
2
BLANK PAGE
5054/02 O/N/04
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section A
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a simplified speed-time graph for a train that travels between two stations.
30
25
speed
m/s
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / minutes
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the motion of the train.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled by the train between the two stations.
distance = …………………….. [2]
(c) Another train travels between the same two stations on a parallel track. This train travels
at a constant speed. It starts its journey at time t = 0 and finishes at t = 90 minutes.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for this train. [2]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 O/N/04 [Turn over

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a water manometer used to measure the pressure inside a gas pipe.
scale scale scale

in mm in mm in mm
gas gas gas

pipe pipe pipe
80 80 80
60 60 60
40 40 40
20 20 20
water 0 0 0
Fig. 2.1 Fig. 2.2 Fig. 2.3
(a) State whether the pressure inside the gas pipe in Fig. 2.1 is larger than or smaller than
atmospheric pressure.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The manometers shown in Figs. 2.2 and 2.3 are connected to the same gas pipe at the
same pressure as shown in Fig. 2.1.
On Figs. 2.2 and 2.3, draw the levels of the liquid in each manometer if
(i) the manometer in Fig. 2.2 contains water and has tubes with twice the diameter of
Fig. 2.1,
(ii) the manometer in Fig. 2.3 contains a liquid with density half that of water.
[2]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 O/N/04

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The manometer shown in Fig. 2.4 has its top end sealed.
scale
in mm sealed end
gas
pipe
trapped air
80
60
40
20
Fig. 2.4
Explain why the water levels are different in Figs. 2.4 and 2.1, even though the pressure
in the gas pipe is the same.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A pole-vaulter runs along a track, reaching a maximum speed of 8.4 m/s. At the end of the
track, he places a pole into the ground as shown in Fig. 3.1, and uses the pole to push
himself vertically upwards.
Fig. 3.1
(a) When the pole-vaulter runs along the track, there is a constant forward force on him of
320 N and a backwards resistive force that varies with his speed as shown in Fig. 3.2.
400
350
resistive force
N 300
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
speed
m/s
Fig. 3.2
Explain why the maximum speed that he can reach is 8.4 m/s.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 O/N/04
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The mass of the pole-vaulter is 60 kg.
(i) Calculate the maximum kinetic energy of the pole-vaulter as he runs along the track.
State clearly the formula that you use.
kinetic energy = ………………….
(ii) The pole is used to convert all this kinetic energy into gravitational potential energy.
Calculate the height through which the pole-vaulter rises. Give your answer to an
appropriate number of significant figures. The gravitational field strength is 10 N/kg.
height = ……………………….
[6]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 shows an air bubble in water. The rays of light are incident on the air bubble.
ray 1
ray 2
ray 3
air bubble
water
Fig. 4.1
The angle of incidence of ray 1 on the air bubble is greater than the critical angle.
The angle of incidence of ray 2 on the air bubble is less than the critical angle.
Ray 3 is perpendicular to the surface of the bubble.
The angle of incidence of ray 2 on the air bubble is 27° and the angle of refraction of ray 2
inside the air bubble is 37°.
(a) On Fig. 4.1, at the point where ray 1 meets the air bubble, mark
(i) the normal to the surface,
(ii) the angle of incidence.

[2]
(b) Complete Fig. 4.1 to show how all three rays continue after they meet the air bubble. [3]
(c) (i) Define what is meant by the refractive index of water.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Calculate the refractive index of water.
refractive index = ………………
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 O/N/04

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
[2]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows part of a long, thin spring used to demonstrate a transverse wave.
hand
Fig. 5.1
The wave shown in Fig. 5.1 has a frequency of 4.0 Hz.
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.1, mark the direction the hand must move to make a transverse wave.
(ii) Describe how the hand must move to make a transverse wave of frequency 4.0 Hz.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The speed of the wave is 0.80 m/s. Calculate its wavelength.
State clearly the formula that you use.
wavelength = ……………….. [3]
(c) State what must be done to double the wavelength of the wave on the spring.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 An experiment to show charging by induction uses a metal sphere mounted on an insulated
support. The sphere is initially uncharged and is shown in Fig. 6.1.
metal sphere
insulated support
Fig. 6.1
(a) A negatively charged rod is brought near the sphere, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
negatively charged
rod
Fig. 6.2
(i) State and explain the movement of electrons in the sphere that occurs as the rod is
brought near.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw the charges on the metal sphere.

[3]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 O/N/04

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The metal sphere is now touched at point A by a wire connected to earth, as shown in
Fig. 6.3.
negatively charged A wire

rod connected
to earth
Fig. 6.3
On Fig. 6.3, draw the charges on the metal sphere. [1]
(c) The wire connected to earth is removed. Then the negatively charged rod is also
removed, as shown in Fig. 6.4.
Fig. 6.4
On Fig. 6.4, draw the charges on the metal sphere. [1]
(d) The support is made from an insulator.

State one material that may be used to make the support.
......................................................................................................................................[1]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows high voltage cables used to transmit electrical energy.
power cables
station transformer transformer
A B
Fig. 7.1
(a) State the purpose of transformer B.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of transformer B.
[3]
(c) (i) Explain why high voltages are used to transmit electrical power.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 O/N/04

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Fig. 7.2 shows how the loss of thermal energy from a cable varies with the
thickness of the cable.
thermal
energy
loss
0
0 thickness of cable
Fig. 7.2
Explain why the loss of thermal energy is less if the cable is thicker.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

14
Section B
Use the lined pages provided and, if necessary, continue on

the separate answer paper available from the Supervisor.
8 A heat pipe is a device that transmits thermal energy along its length. It can transmit energy
thousands of times faster than a solid copper rod. Fig. 8.1 shows a heat pipe attached to black
metal fins. The fins absorb energy from the Sun. The sealed pipe transmits this energy along its
length into a tank of cold water.
tank of
cold water
energy from
Sun
black metal fins

alcohol
partially evacuated copper

pipe sealed at both ends
Fig. 8.1
Thermal energy from the fins is conducted through the walls of the copper pipe and causes the
alcohol to boil. The boiling creates a higher pressure. At the end of the copper pipe in contact with
cold water, the alcohol condenses and creates a lower pressure. The liquid alcohol runs along the
pipe to be boiled again. There is little change in the temperature of the alcohol.
(a) (i) Describe how molecules in the copper conduct energy to the alcohol.
(ii) Explain how boiling and condensation within the heat pipe cause the transfer of energy.
(iii) Explain why the heat pipe is able to transfer energy at a fast rate.
[4]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 O/N/04

15
(b) In one minute, a mass of 25 g of alcohol condenses at the end of the heat pipe. The specific
latent heat of vaporisation of alcohol is 840 J/g.
(i) Define specific latent heat of vaporisation.

(ii) Calculate the amount of energy released when 25 g of alcohol condenses. You may
neglect any change in the temperature of the alcohol.
(iii) Calculate the maximum rise in temperature that the energy calculated in (ii) produces
when used to heat 500 g of cold water. The specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 J/(g °C).
[6]
(c) Black surfaces absorb and emit infra-red radiation better than white surfaces.
(i) Describe an experiment that shows black surfaces absorb radiation better than white
surfaces.
(ii) Describe an experiment that shows black surfaces emit radiation better than white
surfaces at the same temperature.
[5]

16
9 Fig. 9.1 is a diagram of a simple d.c. motor.
pivot
coil
magnet B magnet
pole N S pole
C
carbon carbon
brush brush
current split-ring
commutator
Fig. 9.1
The gap between the two halves of the split-ring commutator is so wide that a carbon brush can
only touch one half of the split-ring at any time. This protects the circuit. It also means that
sometimes the motor will not start when switched on.
The coil is rotated by vertical forces that act downwards on side AB and upwards on side CD. The
current causes a constant force of 3.0 N on each side. The moment created by these forces varies
as the coil turns. The moment is a maximum when the coil is horizontal.
The distances AD and BC are both 0.065 m.
(a) Explain why
(i) the carbon brushes must not be allowed to touch both halves of the split-ring at the
same time,
(ii) sometimes the motor does not start when switched on, even if there is no friction.
[3]
(b) (i) Define the moment of a force.
(ii) Calculate the value of the maximum moment created on the coil.
(iii) Explain why the moment is a maximum when the coil is horizontal.
(iv) Sketch a graph to suggest how the moment acting on the coil varies with time as the coil
rotates at constant speed. Label each axis. On the time axis, mark clearly the time taken
for one revolution of the coil.
[7]
(c) (i) State the measurements you would make in order to find the electrical power input to the
motor and state how your measurements are used to find the electrical power.
(ii) Draw a diagram of the circuit you would use to make these measurements.
[5]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 O/N/04
17
10 A doctor uses a radioactive isotope, iodine-131, to find the volume of blood in a patient’s body.
Information about iodine-131 is given in Fig. 10.1.
proton (atomic) number 53
nucleon (mass) number 131
radiation emitted beta-particles and gamma-rays
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) Describe the structure of an atom of iodine-131.

(ii) The radioactive decay equation below shows an iodine-131 nucleus decaying into a
xenon nucleus (Xe). Copy the equation and insert the proton number and the nucleon
number of the xenon nucleus.
131
53 I → Xe + β
[5]
(b) Describe the differences between beta-particles and gamma-rays. [3]
(c) The doctor uses a sample of iodine-131 that initially produces a count rate of 144 000 per
second.
The whole sample is injected into the patient’s arm. Nine small samples of blood, each of
volume 2.0 cm3, are taken from the other arm at 2 minute intervals.
Fig. 10.2 shows the count rates from the nine samples.
sample number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
time after injection / min 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
count rate / per second 0 4 12 18 28 40 38 36 40
Fig. 10.2
(i) State two reasons why different count rates are obtained from the nine samples.
(ii) Calculate the average value of the count rates from the last four samples.
This is the average count rate from a volume of 2.0 cm3 of blood.
(iii) Using your answer to (ii), determine the volume of blood in the patient’s body, which
has a total count rate of 144 000 per second.
(iv) Sample number 9 is kept.
The count rate is measured again after 16 days.
Estimate the value obtained, given that the half-life of iodine-131 is 8.0 days.
[6]
(d) Describe one precaution that the doctor must take when handling this radioactive source. [1]
© UCLES 2004 5054/02 O/N/04

18 For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
5054/02 O/N/04
19 For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
5054/02 O/N/04
20 For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced.
The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
5054/02 O/N/04

PHYSICS 5054/02
Paper 2 Theory
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
provided.

Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total

MML 8113 3/04 S81899/3
2 For
Examiner's
Use
Section A
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a 0.4 kg mass hanging at rest from a spring.
0.4 kg
mass
Fig. 1.1
(a) State what is meant by the mass of an object.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) On Fig. 1.1, draw an arrow showing the direction and the line of action for each of
the two forces that act on the mass. Write the name of the force next to each
arrow. [2]
(ii) The gravitational field strength is 10 N/kg. Calculate the size of each of the two
forces acting on the mass.
first force = ........................... second force = ............................ [2]
(c) The mass is pulled downwards. State and explain what happens to the upward force.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05

3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a stationary piston in a cylinder.
piston gas cylinder sealed end
Fig. 2.1
(a) The gas in the cylinder exerts the same pressure on the piston as it does on the
sealed end. The sealed end has a smaller cross-sectional area.
Use ideas about molecules to explain why the pressures are the same.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The piston is pushed inwards and the temperature of the gas stays constant.
(i) The piston moves 0.10 m. The average force exerted on the piston to compress
the gas is 23 N.
Calculate the work done. State the formula that you use.
work done = ........................ [2]

(ii) The gas in the cylinder starts at a pressure of 1.0 × 105 Pa and has a volume of
100 cm3. The volume of the gas decreases to 80 cm3.
Calculate the final pressure of the gas. State the formula that you use.
pressure = .......................... [3]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05 [Turn over

4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 A student produces wavefronts in a ripple tank to demonstrate refraction, as shown in
Fig. 3.1. He places a sheet of glass under the water on the right-hand side of the tank. The
arrows show the directions of movement of the wavefronts.
glass sheet
wavefront under the
moving to surface of
the right the water
edge of the
ripple tank
Fig. 3.1
(a) State what is meant by a wavefront.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State what happens to each of the following quantities as the wavefronts change
direction.
(i) wavelength ...............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) speed .......................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) frequency .................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05

5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 X-rays, microwaves, ultra-violet rays and infra-red rays are different types of radiation in the
(a) Write the name of one of these types of radiation in each of the boxes, placing them in
order of increasing wavelength.
shortest wavelength longest wavelength
[2]
(b) State one use of ultra-violet radiation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State two properties that are common to all types of radiation in the electromagnetic
spectrum.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 This question is about the sound produced by a mobile phone and the energy changes
while it is operating.
(a) The sound produced by a ringing phone consists of two notes, one after the other.
Fig. 5.1 shows the trace on an oscilloscope screen produced by the first of the notes.
Fig. 5.1
The second note is louder and has a higher pitch.

(i) On Fig. 5.1, continue the trace to show what happens when the second note is
sounding. [1]
(ii) Explain the differences between the two traces.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) The mobile phone contains a rechargeable battery.
Energy is stored inside the battery as it is charged.
Describe the useful energy change that takes place inside the battery as it is charged
from the mains.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05

7 For
Examiner's
Use
6 An electrostatic generator is used to produce sparks, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
_
_ _
metal dome _ _
spark metal discharge ball
negatively _
charged –
_ _
–
–
– conducting rod
belt –
wire connecting rod to base
Fig. 6.1
The belt carries negative charge to the dome, making the dome negatively charged.
(a) Before a spark is produced, the discharge ball becomes positively charged.
(i) Describe and explain the movement of electrons in the discharge ball and in the
rod as the ball becomes charged.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, mark with an X where there is the most positive charge on the
discharge ball. [1]
(b) A spark jumps between the dome and the discharge ball when there is enough
negative charge on the dome.
A charge of 0.00016 C flows in the spark in a time of 0.012 s.
Calculate the average current in the spark. State the equation that you use.
current = ............................. [3]

8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a coil of wire wound around a rectangular tube.
coil tube
iron rods
Fig. 7.1
(a) Two iron rods are placed next to each other at the bottom of the tube. When the
current is switched on, the two rods repel each other. They move to the sides of the
tube.
Explain why the two iron rods repel.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An iron rod and a similar copper rod are placed next to each other at the bottom of the
tube. State and explain what, if anything, happens to the rods when the current is
switched on.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05

9 For
Examiner's
Use
8 Fig. 8.1 is a half-scale diagram of a radioactive source stored in a safe way.
hinge wooden outer box

with hinged lid
lead inner
container source
Fig. 8.1
(a) The source emits alpha-particles, beta-particles and gamma-rays.
A teacher handles the box. Explain how the teacher is completely protected from the
alpha- and beta-particles but only partially protected from the gamma-rays.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe and explain how the teacher should remove the source from the box safely.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The source is brought near a radiation detector.

(i) Name a suitable detector.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Describe how you would use the detector to show that the source emits particles
at random.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]

10
Section B
Use the lined pages provided and, if necessary, continue on

the separate sheets available from the Supervisor.
9 Fig. 9.1 shows an electric kettle.
plastic
water
heating element
Fig. 9.1
(a) The body of the kettle is plastic but the outside casing of the heating element is metal.
(i) Explain why a fuse is included in the circuit and explain what happens when the fuse
blows. [3]
(ii) Explain why the metal casing of the heating element is connected to earth. [2]
(b) The electrical power input to the kettle is 2000 W and the kettle is used for 6 minutes
(0.1 hour).
Calculate
(i) the electrical energy, in J, supplied to the kettle. State clearly the formula that relates
power, energy and time. [3]
(ii) the electrical energy, in kW h, supplied to the kettle. [2]
(iii) the cost of using the kettle if 1 kW h costs 8 cents. [2]
(c) When the kettle is switched off, the water cools down. Explain, in molecular terms, how
evaporation causes a loss of energy from the water. [3]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05

11
10 A student uses a mobile phone. He is concerned that the energy of the radio waves may cause a
temperature rise in his brain. To investigate this effect, he calculates and tries to measure the
heating effect of the phone on a nearby glass beaker of water.
Information from manufacturer
constant input power 0.20 W

pulse of radio waves
time
The mobile phone emits pulses of radio waves.

Each pulse of waves has energy 0.00012 J.
There are 216 pulses of waves in 1.0 s
The phone is used for 360 s when next to a glass beaker containing 50 g of water.
(a) Calculate
(i) the number of pulses of radio waves produced during the phone call, [2]
(ii) the total energy of the radio waves emitted during the phone call, [2]
(iii) the maximum temperature rise produced in 50 g of water if all of the energy calculated
in (ii) is absorbed by the water. The specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 J/(g °C). [3]
(b) The manufacturer gives the input power of the phone as 0.20 W.
(i) Calculate the energy supplied by the battery when the phone is used for 360 s. [2]
(ii) Calculate the fraction of the energy supplied by the battery that is converted into radio
wave energy during the phone call. [1]
(c) The student uses the mercury-in-glass thermometer shown in Fig. 10.1.
He does not detect any temperature rise in the water in the beaker when the phone is used.
°C –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe how you would check the 0 °C and 100 °C points on the thermometer. [2]
(ii) Explain why the thermometer is not sensitive enough to detect the temperature rise. [1]
(iii) State and explain one change that will make a mercury-in-glass thermometer more
sensitive. [2]

12
11 Fig. 11.1 shows how the currents in a lamp L and in a wire W vary with the potential difference
(p.d.) applied.
2.5
2.0 L
current / A
1.5
1.0
W
0.5
0.0
0 5 10 15
potential difference / V
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) Draw a diagram of the circuit that you would use to take the readings of current and p.d.
for the lamp. State the range you would choose for the voltmeter. [5]
(ii) Describe how the resistance of the lamp L varies as the p.d. increases. [1]
(b) (i) Fig. 11.2 shows the lamp L and the wire W connected in series. The current in the circuit
is 0.8 A.
0.8 A L W
to supply
Fig. 11.2
Determine, using the graph or by calculation,

1. the p.d. across L,
2. the p.d. across W,
3. the p.d. of the supply,
4. the resistance of the lamp L in Fig. 11.2. [5]
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05

13
(ii) Fig. 11.3 shows the lamp and wire connected in parallel.
A p.d. of 12 V is connected across them.
IL
I
IW W
12 V
Fig. 11.3
Determine, using the graph or by calculation,

1. the current IW in the wire W,
2. the current IL in the lamp L,
3. the total current I in the circuit,
4. the resistance of the wire W. [4]

14 For
Examiner's
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05

15 For
Examiner's
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05

16 For
Examiner's
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a
department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2005 5054/02/O/N/05


PHYSICS 5054/02
Paper 2 Theory
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B

Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total

SPA (MML 10759 3/05) T01404/3
2 For
Examiner's
Use
Section A
1 Fig. 1.1 represents the motion of a car along a straight road. As the car approaches a small
town, it slows down. The car travels at a constant speed from the start of the town to the
end of the town. After passing through the town, the car speeds up.
30
speed
m/s car reaches car reaches
start of end of
20
town town
10
0
0 10 20 30
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Determine the speed of the car in the town.
speed = ................................................. [1]

(ii) Determine the time taken by the car to pass through the town.
time taken = .......................................... [1]

(iii) Calculate the distance travelled by the car in the town.
distance = .............................................. [1]
(b) The car accelerates after passing through the town.
Calculate the acceleration. Give the unit of your answer.
acceleration = ........................................ [3]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/O/N/06

3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 shows apparatus that demonstrates how a coin and a piece of paper fall from rest.
air resistance
piece of
piece of paper air resistance
paper
coin
weight
tube coin
containing
air
weight
A
Fig. 2.1 Fig. 2.2
At the positions shown in Fig. 2.1, the coin and paper are falling through air in the tube. The
forces on them are shown in Fig. 2.2. The length of an arrow indicates the size of each
force.
(a) State the initial value of the acceleration of the coin as it falls.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain how Fig. 2.2 shows that

(i) the paper falls with constant speed,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the coin accelerates.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) A vacuum pump is connected to A and the air in the tube is removed.
The coin and paper fall differently in a vacuum from the way they fall in air.
State two of these differences.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 Three horizontal rods are placed with one end just above a Bunsen flame. The other end of
each rod is coated with wax, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
wax copper
brass
wax
glass
wax
Fig. 3.1
(a) Describe how you would use the apparatus to discover which rod is the best conductor
of heat.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two metal teapots are identical except that one is black on the outside and the other is
white on the outside, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
Fig. 3.2
The teapots each contain the same amount of hot water.
State and explain which teapot will cool down more quickly.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/O/N/06
5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a ray of light incident on a mirror at X. The incident ray makes an angle
of 50° with the surface of the mirror.
air
50°
X
mirror
Fig. 4.1
(i) Complete Fig. 4.1 to show the normal and the reflected ray at X. [1]
(ii) State the values of
1. the angle of incidence, ............................................... [1]
2. the angle of reflection. ............................................... [1]
(b) Describe with the help of a diagram how you would find the position of the image
produced by a plane mirror.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]

6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a magnet, two compasses and two nails.
compass
compass nails
S N
magnet
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw an arrow in each compass to show the direction of the magnetic field
at the two positions. [2]
(b) The magnet causes the nails to become magnetised by induction. Both ends of each
nail become magnetic poles.
On Fig. 5.1, mark an N or an S at each end of the two nails to show the magnetic
poles. [2]
(c) When the magnet is removed, the nails are still magnetised.
Describe with the aid of a diagram how the nails can be demagnetised.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/O/N/06

7 For
Examiner's
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a device used to generate electricity. Water entering at the top turns the
wheel. A generator connected to the wheel produces electric current.
water in
generator
wheel
water out
Fig. 6.1
(a) State the two main energy changes that take place in this device as water starts to
flow.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) The change in the potential energy of the water every second is 2000 J. The electrical
energy output is 1200 J every second.
Calculate the efficiency of the process.
efficiency = ............................................ [2]
(c) State two ways in which the device wastes energy.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]

8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows one way to demonstrate an electrical effect.
S
sensitive
ammeter
Fig. 7.1
As the wire is moved downwards between the magnetic poles, the needle of the ammeter
deflects to the right.
(a) State the name of this electrical effect.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State what happens to the needle of the ammeter when the wire is moved upwards
between the magnetic poles.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State and explain what happens when the wire is held stationary between the
magnetic poles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/O/N/06

9 For
Examiner's
Use
8 Fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit using two resistors.
16 V
6 S 2
Fig. 8.1
(a) The switch S is open and the ammeter reading is zero.
State the value of the potential difference across the 6 resistor.
potential difference = ............................. [1]
(b) Switch S is now closed.

(i) State the value of the total resistance of the circuit.
resistance = .............................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the current in the ammeter. State clearly the formula that you use.
current = ..................................................[2]
(iii) Calculate the potential difference across the 6 resistor.
p.d. = .......................................................[2]

10
Section B
Use the separate answer sheets available from the Supervisor.
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a thin sheet of metal suspended from a hole in one corner at A. The weight of the
metal is 0.10 N and the centre of mass is at B. The diagram is drawn full scale.
full scale
A
weight
0.10 N
Fig. 9.1
(a) Describe in detail how you would experimentally determine the position of the centre of
mass of the sheet of metal. [6]
(b) The sheet turns because of the moment of the weight about point A.
(i) Define what is meant by the moment of a force. [2]
(ii) Using a distance measured on Fig. 9.1, calculate the moment of the weight about
point A. State clearly which distance you measured and give the unit of your final answer.
[3]
(c) Fig. 9.2 and Fig. 9.3 show a thick piece of wood with one corner on a table.
Fig. 9.4 shows the same piece of wood balanced on the table. B is the centre of mass.
B B
B
Fig. 9.2 Fig. 9.3 Fig. 9.4
(i) Explain why in Fig. 9.2 the piece of wood falls to the right and in Fig. 9.3 it falls to the
left. [2]
(ii) Explain why the piece of wood in Fig. 9.4 does not fall over. [1]
(iii) Suggest how the thickness of the wood in Fig. 9.4 affects its stability. [1]
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/O/N/06

11
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a cable containing three wires coloured brown, blue and yellow/green, and a
mains plug with the cover removed.
earth live
blue fuse
yellow / green
cable brown
neutral
cable grip
Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe how to connect the cable and the three wires correctly and safely to the plug. [4]
(b) The table lamp shown in Fig. 10.2 is made from plastic. It has only two wires in the cable to
connect it to the plug.
cable
Fig. 10.2
The lamp has a power rating of 100 W and is used with a 230 V supply.
(i) Which wire, earth, live or neutral, is not needed in the cable for the lamp? [1]
(ii) Explain why the lamp is safe to use even though it has only two wires in the cable. [2]
(iii) Explain what is meant by a power rating of 100 W. [2]
(iv) Calculate the value of the fuse that should be used in the plug for this lamp. [3]
(v) Calculate the electrical energy supplied to the lamp in 30 minutes. [3]

12
11 Stars that are being formed emit infra-red radiation. Some of this radiation is received by a
telescope that orbits the Earth. Microwave signals from the telescope are sent to the Earth’s
surface, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
distant star
infra-red radiation
not to scale
microwaves
Earth
telescope
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) Microwaves travel at a speed of 300 000 km/s. The telescope is 600 km above the
Earth’s surface. Calculate the time for a microwave signal from the telescope to reach
the Earth’s surface. [3]
(ii) Infra-red and microwave radiation are both part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
State two other similarities and give one difference between infra-red and microwave
radiation. [3]
(b) As clouds of gas and dust come together to form a star, there is an energy change similar to
the energy change as a ball falls to the ground.
The temperature in the clouds of dust and gas becomes so high that nuclear fusion occurs.
In one such reaction, two isotopes of hydrogen, 21 H and 31 H, fuse together.

(i) Explain why the gas and dust come together. [1]
(ii) State the energy change that causes the rise in temperature as the gas and dust come
together. [2]
(iii) Explain why high temperatures are needed for nuclear fusion to occur. [2]
(iv) Describe the structure of a nucleus of 31 H. [2]
(v) State which element is created by the fusion of two hydrogen nuclei. [1]
(vi) State one effect of nuclear fusion on a star. [1]
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2006 5054/02/O/N/06

*0147365949*
PHYSICS 5054/02
Paper 2 Theory October/November 2007
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B

Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
SPA (MML 13330 4/06) T25097/2

2 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section A
1 A parachutist jumps from an aircraft. Some time later, the parachute opens.
Fig. 1.1 is a graph of the vertical speed of the parachutist plotted against time t.
50
40
speed
m/s 30
20
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) State what happens at t = 20 s and t = 55 s.
at 20 s ..............................................................................................................................
at 55 s ........................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Describe the motion of the parachutist between t = 0 and t = 20 s.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Explain, in terms of the forces acting, why the speed of the parachutist is constant
between t = 25 s and t = 55 s.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Calculate the distance travelled by the parachutist between t = 25 s and t = 55 s.
distance = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/O/N/07

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A student measures the mass and the volume of four samples of rock A, B, C and D. The
results are shown in Fig. 2.1.
A B C D
mass / g 101 202 448 4508
volume / cm3 22 44 80 978
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) Describe in detail how a measuring cylinder is used to find the volume of rock A.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Explain why the volume of rock D cannot be found with an ordinary laboratory
measuring cylinder.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Calculate the density of rock A.
density = ................................................ [2]
(c) Three of the rocks are made from the same material.
State and explain which of the rocks is made from a different material.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 One type of renewable energy source is shown in Fig. 3.1.
Earth’s surface
hot water cold water

and steam down
up
cracks in hot
rocks
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State the name of the renewable energy source shown in Fig. 3.1.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State what is meant by a renewable energy source.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) 1000 kg of cold water at a temperature of 20 °C is pumped down to the hot rocks. 100 kg
of water returns as steam and 900 kg as hot water, both at a temperature of 100 °C.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C) and the specific latent heat of
vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 106 J / kg.
Calculate
(i) the energy needed to heat 1000 kg of water from 20 °C to 100 °C,
energy = ................................................ [2]
(ii) the energy needed to produce 100 kg of steam from water that is already at 100 °C.
energy = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/O/N/07

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 shows equipment placed on top of a house that uses solar energy to produce hot
water.
coil
hot-water
black tank
base
hot water
out
valve
solar
cold water in
collector
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain why the solar collector has a black base.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain why the hot water in the solar collector travels to the hot-water tank.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 4.1 does not show any insulation.
(i) Explain why it is important to insulate the hot-water tank.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain how the hot-water tank is insulated.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows the arrangement of atoms in a solid block.
X Y
Fig. 5.1
(a) End X of the block is heated. Energy is conducted to end Y, which becomes warm.
(i) Explain how heat is conducted from X to Y by the atoms.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Explain why the solid block expands when it is heated.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The block is heated and becomes a liquid.
Describe the changes that occur to the arrangement and the motion of the atoms.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/O/N/07

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the cone of a loudspeaker.
Fig. 6.1
(a) Sound is being produced. Describe in detail the behaviour of the cone and the air near
to it.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The lowest frequency that a human can hear is 20 Hz.
(i) State the highest frequency that a human with normal hearing can hear.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Calculate the longest wavelength of sound that a human can hear. The speed of
sound in air is 340 m / s.
wavelength = ................................................ [2]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows apparatus that can be used to make an electromagnet or a permanent magnet.
copper wire cardboard

tube
Fig. 7.1
Four rods are available. They are made of aluminium, soft iron, steel and wood.
(a) (i) State which rod is used to make a permanent magnet.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Describe how the apparatus is used to make a permanent magnet.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A computer component is screened from external magnetic fields by placing it in a box,
as shown in Fig. 7.2.
computer
magnetic field lines box magnetic field lines
component
Fig. 7.2
There is a strong magnetic field outside the box. The magnetic field lines have not been
drawn near the box.
(i) State the best choice for the material of the box.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, join the magnetic field lines on the left of the box to those on the right,
showing the pattern of the magnetic field. [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/O/N/07

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 EITHER
The Y-plates of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (CRO) are connected to an alternating voltage of

amplitude 4.0 V and frequency 25 Hz.
The Y-gain of the CRO is set at 2.0 V / division and the time-base is set at 0.01 s / division.
On the grid below, draw the trace on the screen of the CRO. Show your calculations beside
the grid. [4]
one division
OR
Fig. 8.1 shows a transistor used in the circuit of a simple moisture detector.
lamp
metal
contacts
water transistor
Fig. 8.1
(a) Describe what happens when the water level in the beaker reaches the metal contacts.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State one use for this simple moisture detector.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

10
Section B
Use the separate sheets available from the Supervisor.
9 Many cars are fitted with an air-bag, as shown in Fig. 9.1. In a collision, the air-bag inflates
and reduces the effect of the impact between the passenger and the dashboard.
air-bag
dashboard
Fig. 9.1
(a) In a test of the air-bag, a heavy ball is used instead of the passenger.
The car is travelling at 14 m / s when it hits a wall. The air-bag inflates and the ball takes
3.0 s to come to rest. The ball has mass 5.0 kg.
(i) Calculate the average deceleration of the ball. [3]
(ii) Calculate the average force exerted on the ball. [2]
(iii) Using ideas about acceleration, explain how the air-bag reduces the force on the
ball during the test. [2]
(b) If there was no air-bag, a large pressure would be exerted on the ball at the point where
it hits the dashboard.
(i) Define pressure. [1]
(ii) The inflated air-bag reduces the pressure exerted on the ball. State two reasons
why the pressure is reduced. [2]
(c) Compressed gas from a small cylinder inflates the air-bag. The cylinder contains a
volume of 600 cm3 of gas at a pressure of 1.4 × 107 Pa. The cylinder and the inflated air-
bag have a volume of 30 000 cm3.
(i) Calculate the pressure of the gas in the inflated air-bag, assuming that the
temperature is constant. [3]
(ii) The pressure inside the cylinder decreases as the air-bag is inflated. Explain, using
ideas about molecules, why the pressure decreases. [2]
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/O/N/07

11
10 (a) Describe an experiment to show the difference between an electrical insulator and an
electrical conductor. Name one example of each. [4]
(b) Fig. 10.1 is a sketch graph of the current in a component P against the potential difference
(p.d.) across it.
current
0
0 potential difference
Fig. 10.1
(i) Define resistance. [1]
(ii) State how the resistance of P varies with the p.d. across it. [1]
(iii) Suggest what component P is. [1]
(iv) Explain why the resistance of P varies with the p.d. across it. [2]
(c) Component P is used in the electrical circuit shown in Fig. 10.2.
A
ammeter 1
20 Ω P
power
supply
A A
ammeter 2 ammeter 3
A
ammeter 4
Fig. 10.2
The current in ammeter 2 is 0.40 A and the current in ammeter 3 is 0.60 A.
(i) Determine the readings of ammeters 1 and 4. [1]
(ii) Calculate the p.d. across the 20 resistor. [2]
(iii) State the p.d. across the power supply. [1]
(iv) Calculate the resistance of P in this circuit. [2]

12
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a ray of light passing through the edge of a converging lens.
normal
40o
25o
converging
lens
Fig. 11.1
(i) Describe what happens to the direction of the ray of light as it enters and leaves the
lens. [2]
(ii) State what happens to the speed, frequency and wavelength of the light as it enters
the lens. [3]
(iii) Calculate the refractive index of the glass used in the lens. [3]
(b) The focal length of the lens is 20 cm. An object is placed 50 cm from the lens and an
image is formed on a screen.
(i) Explain what is meant by the focal length of a lens. You may draw a diagram if you
wish. [2]
(ii) Draw a ray diagram to scale to show the formation of the image. [3]
(iii) The image is real. State two other properties of the image. [2]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.
Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2007 5054/02/O/N/07

*1594589560*
PHYSICS 5054/02
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
provided.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question.
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
SP (NF/CGW) T50315/4
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A microphone has a weight W of 6.0 N. It is suspended by wire X from the ceiling in a radio
studio.
Fig. 1.1 shows the microphone held in the correct position by a horizontal wire Y.
wire X
T wire Y
microphone
Fig. 1.1
(a) The tension T in wire Y is 8.0 N. Use a vector diagram to determine the magnitude and
the direction of the resultant of W and T.
magnitude = ......................................................
direction = ......................................................
[4]
(b) The microphone is at rest. State the tension in wire X.
tension in X = ................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2008 5054/02/O/N/08
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a wooden walking-stick that has a metal head and a rubber foot. It balances For
on a pencil placed 0.50 m from its rubber foot. Examiner’s
Use
metal head 0.50 m
pencil
rubber foot
Fig. 2.1
(a) State the distance between the centre of mass of the walking-stick and the end of the
rubber foot.
distance = ................................................ [1]
(b) The pencil is moved along the walking-stick towards its rubber foot. State and explain
the motion of the walking-stick.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]

4
3 A river flows over a cliff, producing a waterfall. The water, at a temperature of 7.2 °C, falls For
700 m into a pool. The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Calculate the change in the gravitational potential energy of each kilogram of water due
to its fall.
energy change = ................................................ [2]
(b) Assume that all of this energy is converted into thermal energy (heat) in the water in
the pool. Calculate the temperature of this water when it is in the pool. The specific heat
capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
temperature = ................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/O/N/08

5
4 A passenger aeroplane accelerates from rest along a runway. It accelerates at a uniform rate For
for 35 s. At this point it reaches a speed of 84 m / s and then takes off. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Calculate the acceleration of the aeroplane along the runway.
acceleration = ................................................ [2]
(ii) Sketch a speed-time graph for the aeroplane as it travels along the runway.
[3]
(b) Two horizontal forces act on the aeroplane as it accelerates along the runway.
Fig. 4.1
(i) On Fig. 4.1, draw arrows to show the directions and the relative magnitudes of
these forces. [1]
(ii) State what causes the smaller of these two forces.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

6
5 (a) State two differences between the properties of liquids and gases at normal pressures. For
Explain these differences in molecular terms. Examiner’s
Use
Difference 1 .....................................................................................................................
Explanation 1 ...................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
Difference 2 .....................................................................................................................
Explanation 2 ...................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) A nurse places a damp cloth on the forehead of a sick patient. As the water evaporates,
the patient’s forehead is cooled. Explain in terms of the water molecules how the cooling
is produced.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/O/N/08

7
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of white light from a ray-box passing into a glass prism. A spectrum is For
formed between P and Q on the screen. Examiner’s
Use
white light
P
glass prism screen

ray box
Fig. 6.1
(a) State the colour of the light at end P of the spectrum.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State whether the value of each of these properties for blue light is greater than, equal
to or less than the value for red light.
(i) speed in a vacuum ............................................................................................. [1]
(ii) wavelength ......................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows the ray passing through a red filter before it reaches the prism.
red light
P
glass prism screen

ray box
red filter
Fig. 6.2
Complete Fig. 6.2 to show the ray of red light passing through and emerging from the
prism. [2]

8
7 A motorcycle battery consists of six 2.0 V cells in series. The battery supplies energy to the For
headlight. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State the total electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The motorcycle headlight contains two identical filament lamps F and G. Filament lamp
F is always lit but filament lamp G is turned on and off by switch D.
Fig. 7.1 is the circuit diagram.
switch D
battery filament
lamp G
filament
lamp F
Fig. 7.1
When switch D is open, the battery supplies a current of 4.6 A.
Complete the table of Fig. 7.2.
current current in current in

supplied by filament lamp filament lamp
battery / A F/A G/A
switch D
4.6
open
switch D
closed
Fig. 7.2 [3]
(c) Calculate the energy supplied by the battery as an electric charge of 200 C moves
through the circuit.
energy supplied = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/O/N/08

9
8 The reaction that takes place at the centre of the Sun can be represented as For
Examiner’s
211p + 210n 4He.
2
Use
(a) State the name of this type of reaction.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The speed of light is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
(i) The mass of the helium nucleus (42He) produced is different from the total mass of
the two protons and the two neutrons. The difference is 6.6 × 10–29 kg.
Explain why energy is released during the reaction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the energy released in this reaction. State the formula used.
energy = ................................................. [3]

10
Section B

9 Fig. 9.1 shows one swimmer in a race starting before the signal.
loudspeakers
Fig. 9.1
The swimmer is called back by a loud, low-pitched sound from a loudspeaker positioned just at
water level. The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
(a) (i) Describe how the loudspeaker causes sound to travel through the air. [3]
(ii) Explain, in terms of wave properties, what is meant by loud and low-pitched. [3]
(iii) The swimmer is 0.57 m from the loudspeaker when he hears the sound. Calculate the
time taken for the sound to reach him through the air. [2]
(iv) Explain how the time taken differs when sound travels the same distance through air and
through water. [2]
(b) The loudspeaker produces sound of frequency 0.20 kHz.
(i) Calculate the wavelength of this sound. [3]

(ii) Draw a diagram to show what is meant by the term wavelength when applied to a
longitudinal wave such as sound. [2]
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/O/N/08

11
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a wire passing through a hole in a horizontal, plastic board.
compass
wire
–
horizontal 6.0 V
board +
Fig. 10.1
The wire carries a current vertically upwards. A student moves a small compass around the board
and plots the magnetic field lines due to the current.
(a) (i) Draw a diagram of the board as seen from above and mark on it the magnetic field lines
due to the current. [3]
(ii) The current is increased. Describe how the magnetic field changes. [1]
(b) A 6.0 V power supply produces a current of 8.0 A in the wire. Calculate
(i) the total resistance of the circuit, [2]

(ii) the charge that flows through the wire in 2.0 minutes. [2]
(c) The north pole of a bar magnet is held on the left of the wire and the south pole of another bar
magnet is held on the right, as shown in Fig. 10.2.
N S
Fig. 10.2
(i) State the direction of the magnetic field at the wire due to these two poles. [1]
(ii) The wire is flexible. Describe the effect of this magnetic field on the current-carrying wire.
[2]
(iii) The current in the wire is now reversed. State the effect of this on the wire. [1]
(iv) Describe how this effect is put to use in a d.c. motor. [3]

12
11 A thin metal filament J and a metal plate K are sealed inside an evacuated glass vessel. The
electrical connections pass through the glass to external components as shown in Fig. 11.1.
evacuated glass
vessel
6.0 V
battery J
K
mA
– +
1.5 kV d.c.
power supply
Fig. 11.1
(a) A 6.0 V battery is connected to J and the filament becomes white hot. The current from the
battery is 1.6 A. Calculate the power supplied by the battery. [2]
(b) A milliammeter and a 1.5 kV d.c. power supply are connected in series between K and J. The
positive terminal of the power supply is connected to K.
(i) The milliammeter registers a small current. Explain the presence of a current in this circuit
despite the gap between J and K. [3]
(ii) State why the glass vessel must be evacuated. [1]
(iii) One pole of a bar magnet is brought close to the side S of the glass vessel and the
current registered by the milliammeter decreases. Explain why this happens. [2]
(iv) The terminals of the 1.5 kV d.c. power supply are reversed. Explain how this affects the
current in the milliammeter. [2]
Question 11 is continued on page 13.
© UCLES 2008 5054/02/O/N/08

13
(c) Fig. 11.2 shows two terminals M and N of a potential divider (potentiometer) connected
to a 6.0 V battery. N is also connected to one of the two Y-input terminals of a cathode-ray
oscilloscope. The other Y-input terminal is connected to the sliding contact of the potential
divider (potentiometer).
one division
6.0 V
cathode-ray
oscilloscope
N
Fig. 11.2
The sliding contact is at N and the trace on the oscilloscope is a horizontal line passing
through the centre of the screen.
(i) The timebase setting is 1.0 ms / div. Explain why the trace is a horizontal line. [1]
(ii) The Y-gain setting is 2.0 V / div. The sliding contact is moved at a slow, uniform rate from
N to M. Describe in detail what happens to the trace on the screen. [3]
(iii) The Y-gain setting is now changed to 1.0 V / div and the trace disappears from the screen.
State why this happens. [1]

14
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
5054/02/O/N/08
15
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
5054/02/O/N/08
16
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
5054/02/O/N/08
*7965566618*
PHYSICS 5054/02
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
provided.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question.
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
DC (GB/CGW) 12887/5
www.xtremepapers.net
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A diver holds his breath and dives into the sea from a boat to a depth of 25.0 m. The
atmospheric pressure is 1.05 × 105 Pa.
(a) (i) Explain why the pressure at this depth is greater than the atmospheric pressure.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Other than the depth and the atmospheric pressure, state one quantity that affects
the pressure in a liquid.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) The pressure due to 25.0 m of sea-water is 2.55 × 105 Pa. Calculate the total
pressure at this depth.
pressure = .................................................. [1]
(ii) As the diver holds his breath and descends to a depth of 25.0 m, the greater
pressure causes the volume of the air trapped in his lungs to change.
When he is on the boat, the total volume of the air in his lungs is 6000 cm3. Calculate
the volume of this air at a depth of 25.0 m.
volume = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/O/N/09
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a boat stationary in still water in a narrow tunnel. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 2.1
To move the boat, two men lie on the top of it and push against the tunnel roof with their legs.
They exert a total forwards force of 1680 N on the boat.
(a) The men push the boat 50.0 m to the end of the tunnel. Calculate the work done on the
boat by the men.
work done = .................................................. [2]
(b) Explain why the kinetic energy of the boat at the end of the tunnel is less than the work
done on the boat by the men.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
4
3 A hockey player trains on a nylon-fibre surface. As he runs around, his shoes rub against the For
surface and he becomes positively charged. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Explain, in terms of the particles involved, how he becomes positively charged.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what happens to the nylon-fibre surface as he becomes positively charged.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) At the end of the training session, the hockey player touches a metal gate and feels an
electric shock.
(i) State how this shock is produced.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The shock lasts for 0.15 ms. During this time, the current has an average value
of 1.6 mA. Calculate the size of the charge on the hockey player just before he
touches the gate.
charge = .................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/O/N/09
5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows an old coin displayed in a museum. For

Examiner’s
Use
mirror
M
coin
0.17 m
stand
Fig. 4.1
The coin is vertical and is supported by a transparent stand. A vertical mirror 0.17 m behind
the coin ensures that the back of the coin can be seen by a visitor looking from the line P.
M is a point on the back of the coin.
(a) On Fig. 4.1,
(i) draw two rays of light from M to show how its image is produced, [2]
(ii) label the image I. [1]
(b) State the distance from point M on the coin to its image.
distance = .................................................. [1]
6
5 Fig. 5.1 is a full-scale diagram that represents a sound wave of frequency 5.1 kHz in air. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.1, mark the position of one compression with the letter C and of one
rarefaction with the letter R. [2]
(ii) Using the full-scale diagram, measure the wavelength of this sound wave.
wavelength = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Calculate the speed of sound in air.
speed = .................................................. [3]
(b) A sound wave is longitudinal. Describe how a longitudinal wave differs from a transverse
wave.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/O/N/09
7
6 A microwave oven is rated at 650 W and is connected to a 230 V mains supply. For
Examiner’s
(a) (i) Calculate the current from the supply when the microwave oven is switched on. Use
current = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Suggest a rating of the fuse for use with this oven.
fuse rating = .................................................. [1]
(b) The insulation of the mains cable has worn away. The live wire touches the outer metal
casing of the microwave oven.
(i) Explain the hazard that results if the outer metal casing is not earthed.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain how connecting the earth wire to the outer casing and using a fuse of a
suitable rating removes this hazard.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
8
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a rectangular concrete slab of weight 18 000 N. It rests on a brick wall and is For
the roof of a bus shelter. The concrete slab is 3.0 m wide. Examiner’s
Use
concrete slab
3.0 m cables
2.5 m
0.50 m
wall
Fig. 7.1
The wall is 2.5 m from the front of the concrete slab and 0.50 m from the back. The cables
behind the shelter pull downwards and stop the slab toppling forwards.
(a) The concrete slab is of uniform thickness and density. Determine the perpendicular
distance between the wall and the centre of mass of the slab.
distance = .................................................. [1]
(b) (i) State the principle of moments.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Calculate the total downward force exerted by the cables on the slab.
force = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/O/N/09
9
8 (a) State the number of For

Examiner’s
(i) electrons in a neutral atom of the isotope 73Li, Use
number of electrons = .................................................. [1]
(ii) nucleons in an atom of the isotope 20882Pb,
number of nucleons = .................................................. [1]
(iii) protons in an atom of the isotope 2131Na.
number of protons = .................................................. [1]
(b) An atom of the isotope chlorine-35 contains 17 protons.
For an atom of the isotope chlorine-37, state the number of
(i) protons,
number of protons = .................................................. [1]
(ii) neutrons.
number of neutrons = .................................................. [1]
10
Section B

9 Fig. 9.1 shows an electric boiler in a school kitchen.
boiler
plastic
handle
Y
Fig. 9.1
The boiler contains 35 kg of water at 22 °C. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
(a) (i) Calculate the thermal energy (heat) needed to raise the temperature of the water from
22 °C to its boiling point. [3]
(ii) The water in the boiler is heated with a 2600 W immersion heater. Calculate the minimum
time for the heater to bring the water to its boiling point. [2]
(iii) Suggest one reason why the actual time is greater than the time calculated in (ii). [1]
(b) (i) The immersion heater is placed in the water at the bottom of the boiler. Explain in detail
how this ensures that the thermal energy (heat) is transferred throughout the water. [4]
(ii) The boiler is made of steel and has two large plastic handles. When the water is boiling,
the steel surface at X is hot while the plastic handle at Y is cool. Explain why. [2]
(c) Before the water reaches boiling point, water vapour is seen escaping from the boiler.
(i) State the name of the process that produces this water vapour. [1]
(ii) State two differences between this process and boiling. [2]
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/O/N/09
11
10 A space research organisation plans to send astronauts to Mars to examine rocks on its surface.
The organisation will produce a report containing information about conditions on Mars.
(a) (i) The gravitational field strength on the surface of Mars is 3.7 N / kg. Calculate the weight,
on Mars, of a rock of mass 0.50 kg. [2]
(ii) A rock dropped on Mars falls to the surface. State the acceleration of the falling rock.
Assume that there is no air resistance on Mars. [1]
(iii) Calculate the kinetic energy of a 0.50 kg rock as it strikes the surface at a speed of
3.2 m/s. [3]
(b) While still on the surface of Mars, the astronauts will measure the mass of each rock collected.
Fig. 10.1 shows two devices for measuring mass.
device A
device B
rock
10g
20g
20g
50g 10g
rock
20g
50g 20g
50g
50g
A lever arm balance and a set of A spring balance. The spring balance
brass discs. The mass of each disc is is accurately calibrated on Earth and
accurately determined on Earth and the mass values are marked on the
the value is marked on it. vertical scale.
Fig. 10.1
(i) When the two devices are used on Mars, they will give different readings for the mass of
the same rock. Explain why. [3]
(ii) State which device will give the correct reading for the mass. [1]
(c) The astronauts will also determine the density of each rock.
(i) Apart from the mass of the rock, state what other information is needed in order to
calculate the density of the rock. [1]
(ii) Describe a method for determining the density of a small, irregularly shaped rock of
known mass m. [4]
12
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a 9.0 V battery connected in series with a 16.0 Ω resistor and a small metal
conductor X at room temperature.
16.0 Ω
V
9.0 V
Fig. 11.1
A voltmeter measures the potential difference (p.d.) across the 16.0 Ω resistor. At room temperature
the resistance of X is 4.0 Ω.
(a) (i) Calculate the current supplied by the battery. [2]

(ii) Calculate the p.d. across the 16.0 Ω resistor. [1]
(b) X is heated slowly to a very high temperature.
(i) Sketch a graph to show how the resistance of a metal conductor depends on its
temperature. [2]
(ii) State and explain how the voltmeter reading changes as the temperature of X rises. [2]
(iii) Suggest a suitable range for the voltmeter. [2]
There is a choice of part (c) on the following page.
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/O/N/09
13
EITHER (c) (i) Describe in outline how the circuit in Fig. 11.1 can be used as a thermometer.
[2]
(ii) State two advantages of a thermometer such as this over a liquid-in-glass

thermometer. [2]
(iii) The change in voltmeter reading with temperature is non-linear. Explain what is
meant by non-linear. [2]
OR (c) The voltmeter is removed from the circuit in Fig. 11.1 and the negative terminal of
the battery is earthed. A connection is made from the circuit to the inputs A and B of
a NAND gate. The output of the NAND gate is connected to an LED (light-emitting
diode) and a resistor. This is shown in Fig. 11.2.
16.0 Ω
9.0 V
X A
B
LED
Fig. 11.2
(i) Draw the truth table for a NAND gate. [2]
(ii) The LED is lit. State the inputs at A and B and explain why these inputs cause
the LED to light. [2]
(iii) X is slowly heated to a very high temperature. At a certain temperature, the

LED switches off. Explain why this happens. [2]
14
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2009 5054/02/O/N/09
15
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
16
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
5054/02/O/N/09
*9180656846*
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
Section A
Q8
Q9
Q10
Total
DCA (SHW 00445 4/09) 14027/4

2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A window cleaner drops a sponge from the balcony of a hotel at time t = 0. Fig. 1.1 is the
speed-time graph for the motion of the sponge.
14
12
speed
m/s
10
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) State a value for t when the sponge is
(i) moving with a uniform speed,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) accelerating at a non-uniform rate,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) decelerating.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled by the sponge between t = 0 and t = 0.75 s.
distance = ......................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/O/N/10
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows the planet Venus orbiting the Sun in a circular orbit at constant speed. For
Examiner’s
Use
circular orbit
Sun Venus
A force acting on Venus keeps it moving in a circle.
(a) State the name of this force and the object that causes it.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) On Fig. 2.1, draw an arrow through Venus that represents the direction of its
acceleration. [1]
(ii) The size of this acceleration is 9.7 × 10–3 m / s2 and the mass of Venus is 4.9 × 1024 kg.
Calculate the size of the force acting on the planet.
force = ......................................... [2]
(c) As time passes, the planet Venus moves a considerable distance around the circular
orbit. State why no work is done by the force acting on the planet as it moves.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
4
3 (a) State the principle of conservation of energy. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a miner using a head torch powered by a battery pack. The battery pack
contains the cells that power the filament lamp in the head torch.
head torch
battery pack
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the main energy change that takes place in the cells.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State two different forms of energy that are produced in the filament lamp.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) An identical battery pack powers a different head torch that uses light-emitting diodes
(LEDs) instead of the filament lamp. The two torches are equally bright but the efficiency
of the torch using the LEDs is much higher.
State how the amounts of the different forms of energy produced in the LEDs compare
with the amounts produced in the filament lamp.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/O/N/10
5
4 A large number of television sets in a shop are tuned to the same station. The signal travels For
to some of the sets via a satellite in orbit above the Earth. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Explain why only electromagnetic waves are used to transmit the television signal.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State the region of the electromagnetic spectrum used to transmit the television
signal.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Suggest why satellites are sometimes used to transmit television signals.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The other television sets receive the signal directly from a ground-based transmitter
very near to the shop. A salesman notices that the signal sent via the satellite arrives
0.24 s later than the signal sent directly to the other television sets.
The speed of electromagnetic waves is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the distance travelled by the television signal in 0.24 s.
distance = ......................................... [2]
6
5 A motor car has a 12 V electrical supply. Fig. 5.1 shows a heating element in the rear window. For
This heater uses a current of 35 A from the supply. Examiner’s
Use
heater
Fig. 5.1
(a) Calculate
(i) the power developed by the heater,
power = ......................................... [2]
(ii) the thermal energy (heat) generated by the heater in 2.0 minutes.
thermal energy = ......................................... [3]
(b) One cold morning, the rear window of this car is covered in ice. Ice has a specific latent
heat of fusion of 330 J / g.
(i) Calculate the maximum mass of ice that this heater melts in 2.0 minutes.
mass = ......................................... [2]
(ii) State two reasons why the actual quantity of ice melted in 2.0 minutes may be less
than the value calculated.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/O/N/10
7
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the coil of a loudspeaker attached to a cardboard cone. One pole of a For
stationary cylindrical magnet lies near to the coil. Examiner’s
Use
coil
S
N
60 Hz
a.c.
cardboard cone
cylindrical magnet supply
Fig. 6.1
There is an alternating current in the coil of the loudspeaker. A student hears the note
produced.
(a) (i) Explain why the cone of the loudspeaker vibrates.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) Explain how the vibrating cone produces sound waves in the air.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) A stronger cylindrical magnet is now used. State the difference in the note heard.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
8
7 A householder installs a burglar alarm. The alarm does not operate for the first 200 s after For
it is switched on. This time delay lets the householder leave the house and lock up without Examiner’s
setting off the alarm. Use
Fig. 7.1 is a circuit inside the burglar alarm.
capacitor
high resistance
Fig. 7.1
Initially, the switch is open.
(a) (i) The switch is now closed. Explain what happens to the potential difference across
the capacitor as time passes.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Suggest how this circuit may be used for the time delay of the burglar alarm.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The capacitor in the circuit is uncharged when the burglar alarm is first switched on.
A current then starts to charge the capacitor and after 200 s, the charge stored is
5.4 × 10–7 C.
Calculate the average value of the current during this time.
current = ......................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/O/N/10
9
BLANK PAGE
10
Section B For
Examiner’s
8 A car has a gas-filled shock absorber for each of its four wheels. Fig. 8.1 shows one of these
shock absorbers.
attached to car body
piston
cylinder trapped gas
axle
Fig. 8.1
The axles are attached to the cylinders. The body of the car is supported by the four pistons,
which can move up and down inside the cylinders. Each piston has a cross-sectional area of
35 cm2.
(a) A driver of mass 70 kg gets into the car. Calculate
(i) the driver’s weight,
weight = ......................................... [2]
(ii) the average increase in the pressure of the gas in the cylinders.
pressure increase = ......................................... [3]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/O/N/10
11
(b) (i) Explain in detail how the molecules of the gas trapped inside the cylinder by the For
piston exert a pressure on the cylinder. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [4]
(ii) The temperature of the trapped gas remains constant. Explain why the pressure of
the gas increases as the piston is moved further into the cylinder.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) At the end of a long journey, the temperature of the trapped gas in the shock absorbers
has increased substantially.
(i) State what happens to the molecules of the trapped gas due to the temperature
increase.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State and explain the effect of the increased temperature of the gas on the height
of the car body above the road surface.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a young boy lying on his back on the bottom of a swimming pool. He is For
holding his breath and his eyes are open. A red light is positioned on the ground at Q. Examiner’s
Use
At first the boy’s head is touching the pool wall. He notices that, as he slides away from
the pool wall, his eye reaches a point P where he first sees the light at Q. Fig. 9.1 shows
the boy in this position.
red light
air Q
water
pool wall
eye
Fig. 9.1
(i) On Fig. 9.1, draw the ray of light travelling from Q to P. Mark the critical angle for
light in water and label it C. [2]
(ii) Explain why the boy is unable to see the red light at Q when his eye is closer to the
pool wall than P.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(iii) The critical angle is 49°. Calculate the refractive index of water.
refractive index = ......................................... [2]
(iv) The red light is now replaced with a blue light. State the effect of this on the
wavelength of the light in the air.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/O/N/10
13
(b) A small, very brightly illuminated display is located at the back of a projector. The For
projector lens produces an inverted and magnified image of the display on a white Examiner’s
classroom wall. Use
Fig. 9.2 is a scale diagram showing the position and size of both the display and the
image on the wall. R is a point on the display.
image on the wall
R
display
1 cm
scale: 1 cm represents 12 cm
1 cm
Fig. 9.2
(i) The image is inverted and magnified. State two other properties of the image.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) On Fig. 9.2, draw the straight-line ray from R to the image. [1]
(iii) On Fig. 9.2, draw a vertical line representing the lens and label it L. [1]
(iv) A second ray from R to the image passes through a focal point (principal focus)
of the lens. On Fig. 9.2, draw this ray and use it to mark this focal point. Label this
focal point F. [2]
(v) Determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ......................................... [2]
14
10 An atom of phosphorus (chemical symbol P) is composed of 15 electrons, 17 neutrons and For

15 protons. Examiner’s
Use
(a) For this atom, state
(i) the proton number (atomic number), .................................................................. [1]
(ii) the nucleon number (mass number). .................................................................. [1]
(b) This phosphorus atom is radioactive. As it decays to an atom of sulfur (chemical

symbol S), it emits a beta-particle (symbol ).
(i) Write a nuclear equation for this decay.
[3]
(ii) Explain what is meant by a beta-particle.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(iii) A sample of radioactive material contains many of these phosphorus atoms.

Describe an experiment to investigate whether the sample emits only beta-particles.
A diagram may be included.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/O/N/10
15
(c) This isotope of phosphorus has a radioactive half-life of 14.3 days. For
Examiner’s
(i) Explain what is meant by radioactive half-life. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) A solution containing such phosphorus atoms is used in a medical procedure. When
it is prepared, the solution has an activity of 1400 counts / second. The solution
cannot be used when its activity falls below 350 counts / second.
Calculate the maximum time between preparing and using the solution.
time = ......................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/O/N/10
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 5054/21/O/N/10
* 7 0 1 8 2 3 1 1 2 2 *
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
DC (SM/DJ) 25568/4
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a cricket ball as it comes into contact with a cricket bat.
Fig. 1.1
The cricket ball has a mass of 0.16 kg and it hits the bat with a speed of 25 m / s. After being
in contact with the bat for 0.0013 s, the ball rebounds with a speed of 22 m / s in the direction
exactly opposite to its original direction.
(a) State the difference between speed and velocity.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the change in velocity of the cricket ball,
velocity change = ....................................... [1]
(ii) the average acceleration of the ball whilst it is in contact with the bat,
acceleration = ............................................ [2]
(iii) the average force exerted on the ball by the bat.
force = ....................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/O/N/10
3
2 A U-shaped tube, of constant cross-sectional area, contains some water of density For
1000 kg / m3. Oil that does not mix with water is then poured into the right-hand side of the Examiner’s
tube. Fig. 2.1 shows the levels of the water and the oil when equilibrium is reached. Use
oil 0.075 m
0.066 m
X Y
water
Fig. 2.1
Points X and Y are at the same horizontal level. X is 0.066 m below the top surface of the
water. Y is 0.075 m below the top surface of the oil.
(a) State two quantities that influence the pressure beneath the surface of a liquid.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The cross-sectional area of the tube is 5.0 × 10–4 m2.
(i) Calculate the mass of water above the level of X.
mass = ....................................................... [2]
(ii) The pressure caused by 0.066 m of water at X is equal to that caused by 0.075 m of
the oil at Y.
Determine the density of the oil.
density = .................................................... [2]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a firefighter of total weight 840 N in equilibrium at the top of a ladder that is For
pivoted at point P. Examiner’s
Use
ladder
12 m
5.0 m
P
FIRE
Fig. 3.1
The ladder leans towards a burning building at an angle such that the centre of gravity C
of the firefighter is 12 m above and 5.0 m to the right of P. The firefighter holds a hose that
directs a high-speed jet of water horizontally into a burning building.
(a) (i) Calculate the moment M of the firefighter’s weight about P.
moment = .................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 5054/22/O/N/10
5
(ii) The jet of water causes a horizontal force R on the firefighter that acts towards the For
left, through C. This opposes the turning effect of his weight. Calculate the size of Examiner’s
R that, on its own, ensures that M is exactly cancelled. Use
force = ....................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest a third force that has a turning effect about P on the ladder.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the firefighter.
mesh T-shirt
shiny jacket
Fig. 3.2
The jacket of his protection suit has a shiny, silver-coloured outer surface. Underneath it
he wears a loosely-woven mesh T-shirt (string vest).
Explain how wearing the shiny jacket and the mesh T-shirt helps to keep the firefighter
cool when he is close to a source of intense heat.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
6
4 At night, a bright floodlight is used to illuminate a building. The floodlight is a metal filament For
lamp. It is connected in series with a variable resistor and a 230 V mains power supply. Examiner’s
Use
When the floodlight is first switched on, the resistance of the variable resistor is at its maximum
value. In the following few minutes the variable resistor is adjusted so that its resistance
decreases slowly to zero. This causes the brightness of the lamp to increase until it reaches
a maximum. At maximum brightness, the current in the lamp is 12 A.
(a) Calculate the resistance of the lamp at maximum brightness.
resistance = ............................................... [2]
(b) State and explain what happens to the resistance of the lamp as its brightness
increases.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest how, by using the variable resistor in this way, the filament lamp is protected
from damage.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/O/N/10
7
5 A microphone is connected to a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.). A note produced For

by a musical instrument causes a trace on the screen. The trace is stored electronically Examiner’s
in the c.r.o. Use
Fig. 5.1 shows the stored trace displayed on the screen.
timebase
Y-gain
1 division
microphone
CIE
Oscilloscopes
Fig. 5.1
The timebase setting on the oscilloscope is 0.20 ms / division.
(a) Determine the frequency of this note.
frequency = ................................................ [3]
8
(b) A note from a second musical instrument is played and the trace S produced by the For
new note is also displayed on the screen. Fig. 5.2 shows the screen displaying both the Examiner’s
original trace and S. Use
1 division
Fig. 5.2
In each of the three spaces below, describe either a similarity or a difference between
the sounds made by the two notes.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/O/N/10
9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a metal bar placed inside a vertical solenoid. For
Examiner’s
Use
metal bar
d.c. +
power solenoid
supply –
iron paper-clips
Fig. 6.1
The solenoid is a coil of several turns of insulated wire. A d.c. power supply is connected to
the solenoid so that there is a current in it when the supply is switched on. The metal bar is a
short distance above a small pile of iron paper-clips in a glass dish.
The power supply is
• switched on,
• left on for several seconds,
• then switched off.
Describe the behaviour of the paper-clips when this procedure is carried out using a metal
bar of
(a) aluminium,
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) iron,
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) steel.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
10
7 (a) Explain what is meant by background radiation. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe how one human activity has led to an increase in background radiation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
8 Explain, in outline, how a low-density cloud of hydrogen in space becomes a star.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/O/N/10
11
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a very large plane mirror, inclined at 45° to the horizontal, beneath a pattern
on the high ceiling of a hall.
ceiling
R S
mirror
45°
Fig. 9.1
The mirror is set on a stand at head-height immediately below the centre C of the pattern.
R and S are two rays of light from C that strike the mirror.
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.1, continue the rays R and S after they strike the mirror. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 9.1, show how these rays are used to locate the image of C and mark and
label the position of this image with the letter I. [2]
(iii) State two characteristics of this image.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Suggest how the mirror helps visitors to the hall to see the pattern on the ceiling.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
12
(b) Violet light from C has a wavelength of 4.0 × 10–7 m. For

Examiner’s
(i) Calculate the frequency of this light, clearly stating the value of any constant used Use
in the calculation.
frequency = ................................................ [3]
(ii) State two different components of the electromagnetic spectrum that have
wavelengths smaller than the wavelength of violet light.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) 1. Discuss a medical application of one of these components of the electromagnetic

spectrum.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
2. State a health risk associated with this component of the electromagnetic

spectrum.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/O/N/10
13
10 A bus breaks down on a road with a 10° upward slope. The passengers get out and push the For
bus to the top of the slope at a constant speed. Fig. 10.1 shows the passengers exerting a Examiner’s
force on the bus parallel to the line of the slope. Use
Fig. 10.1
(a) The total mass of the bus is 3200 kg.
(i) Calculate the weight of the bus.
weight = ..................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, draw two arrows to show the direction of the weight of the bus and
the direction of the force exerted on the bus by the passengers. [1]
(iii) The total force exerted by the passengers on the bus is 17 000 N along the line
of the slope. Use a graphical method to determine the size and direction of the
resultant of this force and the weight of the bus. State the scale used.
scale = ...........................................................
size of resultant = ...........................................................
direction of resultant = ...........................................................

[4]
14
(iv) The bus travels at a constant speed. State the size of the resultant of all the forces For
acting on the bus. Examiner’s
Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) As the passengers push the bus up the slope, work is done against two forces. State
the names of these two forces and, for each force, state the form of energy produced as
work is done.
force 1 ..............................................................................................................................
form of energy 1 ...............................................................................................................
force 2 ..............................................................................................................................
form of energy 2 ...............................................................................................................

[4]
(c) When the bus reaches the top of the slope, it stops and the passengers get back in.
(i) On the axes of Fig. 10.2, sketch the distance-time graph for the bus from a time
when the passengers are pushing the bus at constant speed until they get back
into the stationary bus.
Fig. 10.2
[3]
(ii) State how the speed of a moving object may be obtained from an accurately drawn
distance-time graph.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/O/N/10
15
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a workman using a cordless electric drill. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 11.1
The motor of the drill is powered by a rechargeable battery with an electromotive force (e.m.f.)
of 18 V. When the drill is used, the power supplied to the motor is 450 W.
(a) Explain what is meant by an e.m.f. of 18 V.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The workman uses the drill for 90 minutes.
Calculate
(i) the electrical energy supplied to the motor,
energy = .................................................... [3]
(ii) the charge that the battery supplies.
charge = .................................................... [2]
16
(c) After 90 minutes of use, the battery is flat. It is connected to a charger and is recharged. For
The charger includes a transformer that produces a 23 V a.c. output from a 230 V a.c. Examiner’s
mains supply. Use
(i) Draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of the transformer.
[2]
(ii) State how the transformer ensures that the a.c. output has a value of 23 V when the
input is the 230 V a.c. mains supply.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) The 23 V a.c. output of the transformer is used in a rectifying circuit to produce
a direct current that recharges the battery. Complete the circuit diagram of the
circuit.
23 V
a.c. ⵑ
output
[2]
(d) State and explain one advantage of using an alternating current (a.c.) for long-distance
transmission of electrical power.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2010 5054/22/O/N/10
* 9 2 9 6 3 4 4 0 1 8 *
PHYSICS 5054/23
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
DC (EM) 34744
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a cricket ball as it comes into contact with a cricket bat.
Fig. 1.1
The cricket ball has a mass of 0.16 kg and it hits the bat with a speed of 25 m / s. After being
in contact with the bat for 0.0013 s, the ball rebounds with a speed of 22 m / s in the direction
exactly opposite to its original direction.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the change in velocity of the cricket ball,
velocity change = ....................................... [1]
(ii) the average acceleration of the ball whilst it is in contact with the bat,
acceleration = ............................................ [2]
(iii) the average force exerted on the ball by the bat.
force = ....................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/O/N/10
3
2 A U-shaped tube, of constant cross-sectional area, contains some water of density For
1000 kg / m3. Oil that does not mix with water is then poured into the right-hand side of the Examiner’s
tube. Fig. 2.1 shows the levels of the water and the oil when equilibrium is reached. Use
oil 0.075 m
0.066 m
X Y
water
Fig. 2.1
Points X and Y are at the same horizontal level. X is 0.066 m below the top surface of the
water. Y is 0.075 m below the top surface of the oil.
(a) State two quantities that influence the pressure beneath the surface of a liquid.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The cross-sectional area of the tube is 5.0 × 10–4 m2.
(i) Calculate the mass of water above the level of X.
mass = ....................................................... [2]
(ii) The pressure caused by 0.066 m of water at X is equal to that caused by 0.075 m of
the oil at Y.
Determine the density of the oil.
density = .................................................... [2]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a firefighter of total weight 840 N in equilibrium at the top of a ladder that is For
pivoted at point P. Examiner’s
Use
ladder
12 m
5.0 m
P
FIRE
Fig. 3.1
The ladder leans towards a burning building at an angle such that the centre of gravity C
of the firefighter is 12 m above and 5.0 m to the right of P. The firefighter holds a hose that
directs a high-speed jet of water horizontally into a burning building.
(a) (i) Calculate the moment M of the firefighter’s weight about P.
moment = .................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 5054/23/O/N/10
5
(ii) The jet of water causes a horizontal force R on the firefighter that acts towards the For
left, through C. This opposes the turning effect of his weight. Calculate the size of Examiner’s
R that, on its own, ensures that M is exactly cancelled. Use
force = ....................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest a third force that has a turning effect about P on the ladder.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the firefighter.
mesh T-shirt
shiny jacket
Fig. 3.2
The jacket of his protection suit has a shiny, silver-coloured outer surface. Underneath it
he wears a loosely-woven mesh T-shirt (string vest).
Explain how wearing the shiny jacket and the mesh T-shirt helps to keep the firefighter
cool when he is close to a source of intense heat.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
6
4 At night, a bright floodlight is used to illuminate a building. The floodlight is a metal filament For
lamp. It is connected in series with a variable resistor and a 230 V mains power supply. Examiner’s
Use
When the floodlight is first switched on, the resistance of the variable resistor is at its maximum
value. In the following few minutes the variable resistor is adjusted so that its resistance
decreases slowly to zero. This causes the brightness of the lamp to increase until it reaches
a maximum. At maximum brightness, the current in the lamp is 12 A.
(a) Calculate the resistance of the lamp at maximum brightness.
resistance = ............................................... [2]
(b) State and explain what happens to the resistance of the lamp as its brightness
increases.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest how, by using the variable resistor in this way, the filament lamp is protected
from damage.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/O/N/10
7
5 A microphone is connected to a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.). A note produced For

by a musical instrument causes a trace on the screen. The trace is stored electronically Examiner’s
in the c.r.o. Use
Fig. 5.1 shows the stored trace displayed on the screen.
timebase
Y-gain
1 division
microphone
CIE
Oscilloscopes
Fig. 5.1
The timebase setting on the oscilloscope is 0.20 ms / division.
(a) Determine the frequency of this note.
frequency = ................................................ [3]
8
(b) A note from a second musical instrument is played and the trace S produced by the For
new note is also displayed on the screen. Fig. 5.2 shows the screen displaying both the Examiner’s
original trace and S. Use
1 division
Fig. 5.2
In each of the three spaces below, describe either a similarity or a difference between
the sounds made by the two notes.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/O/N/10
9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a metal bar placed inside a vertical solenoid. For
Examiner’s
Use
metal bar
d.c. +
power solenoid
supply –
iron paper-clips
Fig. 6.1
The solenoid is a coil of several turns of insulated wire. A d.c. power supply is connected to
the solenoid so that there is a current in it when the supply is switched on. The metal bar is a
short distance above a small pile of iron paper-clips in a glass dish.
The power supply is
• switched on,
• left on for several seconds,
• then switched off.
Describe the behaviour of the paper-clips when this procedure is carried out using a metal
bar of
(a) aluminium,
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) iron,
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) steel.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
10
7 (a) Explain what is meant by background radiation. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe how one human activity has led to an increase in background radiation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
8 Explain, in outline, how a low-density cloud of hydrogen in space becomes a star.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/O/N/10
11
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a very large plane mirror, inclined at 45° to the horizontal, beneath a pattern
on the high ceiling of a hall.
ceiling
R S
mirror
45°
Fig. 9.1
The mirror is set on a stand at head-height immediately below the centre C of the pattern.
R and S are two rays of light from C that strike the mirror.
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.1, continue the rays R and S after they strike the mirror. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 9.1, show how these rays are used to locate the image of C and mark and
label the position of this image with the letter I. [2]
(iii) State two characteristics of this image.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Suggest how the mirror helps visitors to the hall to see the pattern on the ceiling.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
12
(b) Violet light from C has a wavelength of 4.0 × 10–7 m. For

Examiner’s
(i) Calculate the frequency of this light, clearly stating the value of any constant used Use
in the calculation.
frequency = ................................................ [3]
(ii) State two different components of the electromagnetic spectrum that have
wavelengths smaller than the wavelength of violet light.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) 1. Discuss a medical application of one of these components of the electromagnetic

spectrum.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
2. State a health risk associated with this component of the electromagnetic

spectrum.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/O/N/10
13
10 A bus breaks down on a road with a 10° upward slope. The passengers get out and push the For
bus to the top of the slope at a constant speed. Fig. 10.1 shows the passengers exerting a Examiner’s
force on the bus parallel to the line of the slope. Use
Fig. 10.1
(a) The total mass of the bus is 3200 kg.
(i) Calculate the weight of the bus.
weight = ..................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, draw two arrows to show the direction of the weight of the bus and
the direction of the force exerted on the bus by the passengers. [1]
(iii) The total force exerted by the passengers on the bus is 17 000 N along the line
of the slope. Use a graphical method to determine the size and direction of the
resultant of this force and the weight of the bus. State the scale used.
scale = ...........................................................
size of resultant = ...........................................................
direction of resultant = ...........................................................

[4]
14
(iv) The bus travels at a constant speed. State the size of the resultant of all the forces For
acting on the bus. Examiner’s
Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) As the passengers push the bus up the slope, work is done against two forces. State
the names of these two forces and, for each force, state the form of energy produced as
work is done.
force 1 ..............................................................................................................................
form of energy 1 ...............................................................................................................
force 2 ..............................................................................................................................
form of energy 2 ...............................................................................................................

[4]
(c) When the bus reaches the top of the slope, it stops and the passengers get back in.
(i) On the axes of Fig. 10.2, sketch the distance-time graph for the bus from a time
when the passengers are pushing the bus at constant speed until they get back
into the stationary bus.
Fig. 10.2
[3]
(ii) State how the speed of a moving object may be obtained from an accurately drawn
distance-time graph.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/O/N/10
15
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a workman using a cordless electric drill. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 11.1
The motor of the drill is powered by a rechargeable battery with an electromotive force (e.m.f.)
of 18 V. When the drill is used, the power supplied to the motor is 450 W.
(a) Explain what is meant by an e.m.f. of 18 V.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The workman uses the drill for 90 minutes.
Calculate
(i) the electrical energy supplied to the motor,
energy = .................................................... [3]
(ii) the charge that the battery supplies.
charge = .................................................... [2]
16
(c) After 90 minutes of use, the battery is flat. It is connected to a charger and is recharged. For
The charger includes a transformer that produces a 23 V a.c. output from a 230 V a.c. Examiner’s
mains supply. Use
(i) Draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of the transformer.
[2]
(ii) State how the transformer ensures that the a.c. output has a value of 23 V when the
input is the 230 V a.c. mains supply.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) The 23 V a.c. output of the transformer is used in a rectifying circuit to produce
a direct current that recharges the battery. Complete the circuit diagram of the
circuit.
23 V
a.c. ⵑ
output
[2]
(d) State and explain one advantage of using an alternating current (a.c.) for long-distance
transmission of electrical power.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2010 5054/23/O/N/10
* 0 1 5 8 3 2 2 3 1 8 *
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
DC (LEO/CGW) 34349/3
2
Section A
1 Fig. 1.1 shows an ice cube at 0 °C.
0.040 m
0.040 m
0.040 m
Fig. 1.1
The sides of the cube are of length 0.040 m. Ice at 0 °C has a density of 920 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate
(i) the mass of the ice cube,
mass = ....................................................[3]
(ii) the weight of the ice cube.
weight = ....................................................[1]
(b) The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.4 × 105 J / kg. Calculate the thermal energy (heat)
absorbed by the ice cube as it melts.
thermal energy = ....................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/O/N/11

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows an elevator (lift) that is supported by a cable.
motor
pulley
cable
elevator
concrete block
The cable passes around the axle of an electric motor and over a pulley. The cable is then attached
to a concrete block that has the same mass as the empty elevator. As the elevator moves up, the
concrete block moves down.
(a) Explain why very little work is done by the electric motor when lifting up the empty elevator.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Several people of total weight 4900 N are travelling upwards at constant speed in the elevator.
They rise through a distance of 24 m in 28 s.
Calculate the minimum power output of the electric motor.
power = ....................................................[3]

4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the flame of a Bunsen burner.
flame
Bunsen
burner
Fig. 3.1
(a) A thermocouple thermometer contains a voltmeter. It is used to measure the temperature in

the flame of the Bunsen burner.
(i) On Fig. 3.1, draw a labelled diagram of the structure of the thermocouple thermometer
as it measures the temperature in the flame. [2]
(ii) Describe how the fixed points and the reading of the voltmeter are used to determine the
value of the temperature in the flame.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The thermocouple thermometer is used to measure the temperature in the flame because
it can measure very high temperatures. State and explain one other advantage of using a
thermocouple thermometer to determine temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/O/N/11

5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a glass lens in air and its two focal points F1 and F2.
lens
three
rays
F1 F2
Fig. 4.1
Three rays of light pass through F1 to the lens.
(a) On Fig. 4.1, continue the three rays through the lens and into the air. [2]
(b) State what happens to the speed of light on
(i) entering the glass lens from air,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) leaving the lens and returning to the air.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Light of wavelength 6.0 × 10–7 m travels in air at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s.
(i) Calculate the frequency of this light.
frequency = ....................................................[2]
(ii) State the effect, if any, on the frequency as the light enters the glass from air.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

6
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a nylon rod being rubbed with a woollen cloth.
cloth
rod
Fig. 5.1
The rod becomes negatively charged.
(a) (i) Explain how rubbing the nylon rod makes it negatively charged.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what happens to the cloth as the rod becomes negatively charged.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the negatively-charged rod placed near to a conducting sphere. The sphere is
suspended by an insulating thread.
insulating thread
negatively-charged
rod
conducting
sphere – –
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
Fig. 5.2
(i) On Fig. 5.2, draw the distribution of positive and negative charges on the sphere. [2]
(ii) Explain why the sphere is attracted to the rod.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/O/N/11

7
6 When a car is moving, its electrical equipment is powered by an a.c. generator.
(a) The coil of the a.c. generator is rotated by the car engine.
(i) On the axes in Fig. 6.1, sketch a graph of the output voltage of the coil against time for
two rotations of the coil of the generator.
output
voltage
0
0 time
[1]
Fig. 6.1
(ii) The speed of the car increases and so does the speed of rotation of the coil.
State two changes that this causes to the output voltage.
change 1 ............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
change 2 ............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) When the car engine is off, the current in a lamp from a 12 V battery is 0.50 A. Calculate the
resistance of the lamp.
resistance = ....................................................[2]

8
7 Fig. 7.1 is the circuit diagram for the volume control of a loudspeaker.
loudspeaker
input
voltage S
Fig. 7.1
The circuit includes a variable potential divider (potentiometer). The input voltage is connected
across the ends of the potential divider. The loudspeaker is connected between the sliding contact
S and the terminal C.
(a) The sliding contact S is moved towards C. State and explain the effect on the sound produced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The loudspeaker emits a sound of constant pitch. Over a period of time, this sound becomes
louder and louder. State the effect, if any, on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound
wave during this time.
the amplitude ............................................................................................................................
the frequency ............................................................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/O/N/11

9
8 53 I. As a nucleus of this isotope decays, it emits a

(a) One radioactive isotope of iodine is 131
beta-particle (symbol: β) and it becomes a nucleus of an isotope of xenon (symbol: Xe).
Complete the equation in nuclide form, for this decay.
131 ....... .......

I Xe + β
53 ....... .......
[2]
(b) A sample of a radioactive isotope emits both beta-particles and gamma-rays.
Fig. 8.1 shows these two types of radiation entering a magnetic field.
magnetic field
into the page
beta-particles
and gamma-rays
Fig. 8.1
The direction of the magnetic field is into the page.
On Fig. 8.1, mark and label the path taken by
(i) the beta-particles, [1]
(ii) the gamma-rays. [1]
(c) Emission from a radioactive source is a random process.
State two ways in which the process is random.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]

10
Section B
9 Fig. 9.1 is the speed-time graph for a rocket from the moment that the fuel starts to burn at
time t = 0.
1400
speed
m/s 1200
1000
800
600
400
200
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
t /s
Fig. 9.1
(a) State the principal energy changes taking place as the rocket accelerates upwards.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) (i) State the size of the acceleration of the rocket at t = 0.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what happens to the acceleration of the rocket between t = 5 s and t = 80 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Calculate the acceleration of the rocket at t = 80 s.
acceleration = ....................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/O/N/11

11
(iv) The total mass of the rocket at t = 80 s is 1.6 × 106 kg. Calculate the resultant force on the
rocket at this time.
resultant force = ....................................................[2]
(v) The total weight of the rocket at t = 80 s is 1.6 × 107 N. Calculate the upward force on the
rocket at this time, caused by the burning fuel.
upward force = ....................................................[1]
(c) As the rocket burns fuel, it ejects hot gas downwards.
(i) State Newton’s third law of motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how Newton’s third law of motion applies to the upward force on the rocket and
to the force on the hot gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

12
10 Fig. 10.1 is the circuit diagram of a fan oven that works from a 230 V a.c. mains supply.
S1
S2
230 V a.c.
supply M fan motor
heater
Fig. 10.1
The oven contains a 3500 W electric heater, an electric fan operated by a 200 W fan motor and two
switches S1 and S2.
(a) (i) When switches S1 and S2 are open, both the heater and the fan motor are off, as shown
in Fig. 10.2.
S1 S2 heater fan motor
open open off off
off on
on on
Fig. 10.2
Complete Fig. 10.2 by writing “open” or “closed” in the boxes. [2]
(ii) Explain how the circuit represented by Fig. 10.1 ensures that the heater cannot be
switched on when the fan motor is off.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Suggest one reason why the circuit is designed so that the heater cannot be switched on
when the fan motor is off.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/O/N/11

13
(b) (i) The heater and the fan motor are both switched on. Calculate the current supplied to the
oven.
current = ....................................................[2]
(ii) 1. Suggest a suitable rating for the fuse to be used with this oven.
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. The fuse is placed in one of the three wires in the mains lead. State the wire in
which it is placed.
................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Explain how earthing the metal case of the oven makes it safer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The cost of 1 kW h of electrical energy is 35 cents. Calculate the cost of leaving just the fan
motor switched on for 12 hours.
cost = ....................................................[3]

14
11 A crankshaft is a shaped metal bar that is part of a car engine. It is free to rotate about an axis, as
shown in Fig. 11.1.
F
0.050 m
P
axis of
crankshaft
crankshaft
direction
of rotation
Fig. 11.1
When the crankshaft is horizontal, a vertical force F of 8200 N acts downwards on the crankshaft
at P. This causes the crankshaft to rotate. The distance between P and the axis of the crankshaft is
0.050 m.
(a) (i) State what is meant by the moment of a force.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The crankshaft is horizontal. Calculate the moment of F about the axis of the crankshaft.
moment = ....................................................[2]
(iii) The size and direction of the vertical force F, acting on the crankshaft at P, remain
constant. Explain why the moment of F decreases as the crankshaft rotates through a
small angle.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/O/N/11

15
(b) The force F on the crankshaft at P is exerted by a metal rod connected to a piston. The piston
traps high-pressure gas in a cylinder, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
cylinder
high-pressure gas
piston
metal rod
P
force F
Fig. 11.2
The force F, of 8200 N, acts because the high-pressure gas pushes down on the piston. The
air pressure outside the cylinder is 1.0 × 105 Pa and the cross-sectional area of the piston is
0.0067 m2.
(i) Calculate the minimum value of the pressure of the gas in the cylinder.
pressure = ....................................................[3]
(ii) Suggest why, in practice, the pressure of the gas in the cylinder is greater than the value
calculated in (i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
Question 11 continues on the next page.

16
(c) The piston moves in the cylinder and the gas expands. State and explain what happens to the
force F.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Explain, in molecular terms, why heating a gas at constant volume causes its pressure to
increase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2011 5054/21/O/N/11

* 1 3 3 7 8 2 2 7 7 5 *
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
DC (CW/SW) 37000/4
2
Section A
1 A builder needs to determine the density of a solid cube of wood.
He places the 50 cm mark of a uniform metre rule on a pivot, so that the rule balances.
He then places the cube on the rule with its centre of gravity directly above the 75 cm mark.
A mass of 0.050 kg is moved along the rule until balance is restored. This is shown in Fig. 1.1.
0 cm 10 cm 50 cm 75 cm 100 cm
0.050 kg pivot cube

mass
The rule is balanced when the 0.050 kg mass is at the 10 cm mark.
(a) Calculate the mass of the cube.
mass = ...........................................................[3]
(b) The cube has a volume of 1.6 × 10–4 m3. Determine the density of the wood.
density = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/O/N/11

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a skier of mass 85 kg skiing down a very steep slope.
skier
33 m
B P
The skier starts from rest at the top T of the slope. The force of gravity accelerates him down the
slope.
When he reaches the bottom B of the slope, his kinetic energy is 5.5 × 104 J.
(a) The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg. Calculate
(i) the weight of the skier,
weight = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the minimum possible difference in height between T and B.
height difference = ...........................................................[2]
(b) At B, the skier digs his skis into the snow and stops at the point P after travelling 33 m
horizontally.
Calculate the average horizontal force that acts on the skier between B and P.
force = ...........................................................[2]
4
3 A helium balloon carries scientific instruments high up in the atmosphere.
Fig. 3.1 shows the partially inflated helium balloon leaving the ground.
Fig. 3.1
(a) A completely deflated balloon contains no gas. The helium to inflate it is stored in a very large
cylinder at a pressure p1 of 2.5 × 107 Pa. Helium that occupies a volume V1 of 18 m3 in the
cylinder is slowly released into the balloon until the pressure p2 in the balloon is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
The temperature of the helium remains constant.
(i) State the equation that relates the volume V2 of the helium in the balloon at launch to p1,
p2 and V1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate V2.
V2 = ...........................................................[2]
(b) When it leaves the ground, the balloon is only partially inflated. Suggest and explain why this
is necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/O/N/11

5
4 Fig. 4.1 represents a microwave travelling in air through points A and B.
A B distance
The distance between A and B is 40 cm.
(a) State the speed of microwaves in air.
speed = ...........................................................[1]
(b) Determine the wavelength of the microwave shown in Fig. 4.1.
wavelength = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Describe how microwaves are used in the transmission of television signals by satellite.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) State two properties common to all electromagnetic waves.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]

6
5 Fig. 5.1 shows part of an electric bell.
S
iron
bar
iron
core N
Fig. 5.1
A switch and a cell are in series with a length of wire coiled around an iron core.
The switch is closed and the current in the wire produces a south pole S and a north pole N at
the ends of the core, as shown in Fig. 5.1. Magnetic poles are also produced in a small iron bar,
placed near to the ends of the core.
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.1, mark with an N the position of the north pole produced in the iron bar and
mark with an S the position of the south pole produced in the iron bar. [1]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the iron bar once it is magnetised.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The switch is opened and there is no current in the wire. State what happens to the magnetic
poles in the iron bar.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/O/N/11

7
6 An electrical engineer measures the potential difference across a length of metal wire and the
current in the wire. He does this for different values of the current.
(a) (i) Draw a labelled circuit diagram of a circuit that enables the engineer to do this.
[3]
(ii) Describe how the circuit is used.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State the equation that defines resistance.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The engineer performs the experiment and notices that the potential difference across the
wire is directly proportional to the current in it. He calculates the resistance of the wire and
plots a graph of the resistance against the current.
On Fig. 6.1, sketch the shape of this graph.
resistance
0
0 current
[1]
Fig. 6.1

8
7 The current in the transmission line used to supply electrical power to a village is 65 A. The power
is transmitted at a voltage of 23 000 V.
(a) Calculate the power supplied to the village.
power = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The transmission line has a resistance of 3.0 Ω. Calculate
(i) the potential difference across a 3.0 Ω resistor that carries a current of 65 A,
potential difference = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the thermal energy (heat) produced in 1.0 s in a 3.0 Ω resistor that carries a current
of 65 A.
heat = ...........................................................[1]
(c) (i) State one advantage of transmitting electrical power at a high voltage.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest one reason why the mains power supply to the houses in the village is at a
voltage much lower than 23 000 V.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/O/N/11

9
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a short-sighted eye.
rays of light
eye lens
retina
Fig. 8.1
Rays of light from a distant star are parallel as they reach the lens of the eye. Refraction of light as
it enters the eye has been ignored in Fig. 8.1.
(a) (i) On Fig. 8.1, continue the rays to show their paths inside the short-sighted eye until they
strike the retina. [2]
(ii) Explain how your diagram shows that the image of the star seen by the observer is
blurred.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows three parallel rays of light.
Fig. 8.2
(i) On the line P in Fig. 8.2, draw the shape of a lens that is used to correct short sight. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.2, continue the three rays through the lens that you have drawn. [1]

10
Section B
9 Fig. 9.1 is the speed-time graph for a racing car of total mass 650 kg as it sets off from rest at the
start of a race.
80
speed 70
m/s
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time / s
Fig. 9.1
The car travels in a straight line until time t = 9.0 s.
(a) State the speed of the car at time t = 9.0 s.
speed = ...........................................................[1]
(b) Calculate, for the car between times t = 0 and t = 9.0 s,
(i) the distance travelled,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/O/N/11

11
(ii) the acceleration of the car,
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the resultant force acting on the car.
force = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The acceleration of the car is constant between t = 0 and t = 9.0 s.
Suggest and explain why the driving force on the car must increase to keep the acceleration
constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) After t = 9.0 s, the car starts to turn a corner and follows a circular path at constant speed.
(i) Explain why the car is accelerating even though its speed is constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State the direction of this acceleration.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State and explain what causes the car to accelerate as it turns the corner.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

12
10 A lead bullet of mass 1.9 g is fired from a rifle in a sports club. The bullet misses the target and
embeds itself in a wall behind the target. The bullet melts as it is stopped by the wall. The specific
latent heat of fusion of lead is 2.2 × 104 J / kg.
(a) State what is meant by melting point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Calculate the energy required to melt the bullet, at its melting point, without raising its
temperature.
energy = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) Assume that the energy that melts the bullet is equal to its kinetic energy just before it
strikes the wall. Calculate the speed of the bullet just before it strikes the wall.
speed = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) Suggest two reasons why the speed of the bullet as it leaves the rifle is greater than the
value calculated in (ii).
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Describe how the molecular structure of the lead changes as it melts.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/O/N/11

13
(d) On another occasion, lead bullets of twice the mass are used. One of these heavier bullets
hits the wall with the speed calculated in (b)(ii). State and explain whether this bullet melts as
it is stopped by the wall.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
Please turn over for Question 11.

14
11 Fig. 11.1 illustrates a neutron hitting a uranium-235 nucleus.
krypton
nucleus
neutron
barium
uranium-235 nucleus
nucleus
Fig. 11.1
The uranium-235 nucleus splits into a nucleus of barium (Ba) and a nucleus of krypton (Kr) and
three neutrons are released.
(a) State the name of this process.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) This process may be represented by a nuclear equation. An incomplete version of this
equation is shown below.
23 5 U + 10n + 92Kr + 3 10n

92 56Ba
(i) Calculate
1. the number of neutrons in a nucleus of uranium-235,
number of neutrons = ...........................................................[1]
2. the proton number (atomic number) of krypton,
proton number = ...........................................................[1]
3. the nucleon number (mass number) of the barium nucleus.
nucleon number = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/O/N/11

15
(ii) During this process, there is a decrease in mass. Energy is released. The decrease in
mass is 3.1 × 10–28 kg and the speed of light is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the energy released in this process.
energy = ...........................................................[3]
(c) A nuclear power station generates electrical energy. In the power station, steam is used to
drive a turbine. Describe how the splitting of uranium-235 is used to produce the steam. You
may include a block diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
(d) Some of the waste products from a nuclear power station are radioactive and have very long
half-lives.
(i) State the meaning of half-life.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Describe one safety precaution that is taken when radioactive waste products are
handled.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/O/N/11

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 5054/22/O/N/11

* 7 9 0 4 3 1 0 7 4 6 *
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. For Examiner’s Use
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
DC (NF/CGW) 42579/4
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A parachutist of total weight 950 N falls vertically at a constant velocity of 6.5 m / s.
(a) State the size and direction of the resistive (drag) force acting on the parachutist.
size of resistive force: .......................................................................................................
direction of resistive force: ...............................................................................................

[2]
(b) At a certain height, the wind starts to blow and the parachutist moves horizontally at a
velocity of 4.5 m / s as he continues to fall.
Use a graphical method to add together the horizontal and the vertical velocities to
determine the size of the resultant velocity of the parachutist. Label the velocities and
state the scale that you use.
size of velocity = ......................................................
scale = ......................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/O/N/12
3
2 A thermocouple thermometer is made from two different metals and a voltmeter. One junction For
of the thermocouple thermometer is placed in a beaker containing a mixture of water and Examiner’s
ice. The other junction is placed inside a high-temperature furnace, as shown in Fig. 2.1. Use
high-
metal 1 temperature
furnace
metal 2
water
and ice
Fig. 2.1
(a) The thermocouple thermometer has a linear output over the operating temperature
range of the furnace.
(i) State what, for a thermocouple thermometer, is meant by a linear output.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The junction inside the furnace is at temperature T. Fig. 2.2 shows the reading V of
the voltmeter at two values of T that are within the operating temperature range of
the furnace.
T / °C V / mV
750 6.20
800 7.70
Fig. 2.2
When the furnace is operating at a high temperature, the furnace door is opened
and the reading of the voltmeter falls to 6.80 mV.
Calculate the temperature of the junction inside the furnace.
temperature = ................................................. [2]
(b) State why a liquid-in-glass thermometer is not used to measure the temperature inside
the furnace.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an electric motor being used on a building site to lift bricks. For
Examiner’s
Use
electric motor
2.8 m
Fig. 3.1
The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg. The motor lifts bricks of total mass 54 kg through a
height of 2.8 m in 3.0 s.
(a) Calculate
(i) the work done in lifting the bricks,
work done = ................................................. [2]
(ii) the useful output power of the motor.
power = ................................................. [2]
(b) Suggest two reasons why the electrical power supplied to the motor is greater than its
useful output power.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/O/N/12
5
(c) (i) Fig. 3.2 shows a battery and an electric motor. The battery is used to power the For
motor. Complete Fig. 3.2 to show the circuit diagram of a circuit that is used to Examiner’s
determine the power supplied to the electric motor. Use
Fig. 3.2 [2]
(ii) State how the power supplied is calculated.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

6
4 A petrol tanker has mass 2800 kg when empty and holds 30 m3 of petrol when full. The For
density of petrol is 740 kg / m3. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Calculate the total mass of the tanker when full of petrol.
mass = ................................................. [2]
(b) The full tanker is travelling along a road when the driver observes an obstruction and
applies the brakes. A resultant force of 30 000 N acts on the tanker.
Calculate the deceleration of the tanker.
deceleration = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/O/N/12

7
5 A water wave of frequency 3.6 Hz is generated in a ripple tank. Fig. 5.1 is a scale diagram For
that shows the wavefronts travelling from deep water to shallow water in the ripple tank. A Examiner’s
length of 1.0 cm on the diagram represents 8.0 cm in the ripple tank. Use
deep water
wave
generator
shallow
water
scale 1:8
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Using measurements from Fig. 5.1, determine the wavelength of the wave in the
deep water.
wavelength = ................................................. [2]
(ii) Calculate the speed of the wave in the deep water.
speed = ................................................. [2]
(b) As the wave passes into the shallow water, state what happens to
(i) the frequency,
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the speed.
............................................................................................................................. [1]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows part of a page from a pupil’s notebook. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 6.1
List three errors in the pupil’s notes.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) State and explain one application of X-rays in engineering.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/O/N/12

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a solenoid made from wire wound around a plastic cylinder. For
Examiner’s
Use
plastic
cylinder
+ –
Fig. 7.1
A current in the solenoid produces a magnetic field.
On Fig. 7.1, draw the pattern of the magnetic field lines inside and outside the cylinder.
[2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a beam of beta-particles, in a vacuum, passing into a magnetic field.
beta-particles magnetic field

out of the page
Fig. 7.2
The movement of the beta-particles from left to right is an electric current.
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of the conventional current. [1]
(ii) A solenoid is used to produce the magnetic field that lies within the shaded region
of Fig. 7.2. The direction of the field is out of the page.
1. On Fig. 7.2, draw the path followed by one of the beta-particles in the shaded
region. [2]
2. The direction of the current in the solenoid is reversed. State what happens to
the path of the beta-particle.
...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... [1]

10
8 A 600 Ω resistor and a thermistor are connected in series with an ammeter and a 20 V d.c. For
(direct current) power supply. A voltmeter is in parallel with the resistor. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 8.1 is the circuit diagram.
600 1 V
20 V d.c. +
power _
supply
thermistor
Fig. 8.1
The ammeter reads 0.025 A.
(a) Calculate
(i) the reading on the voltmeter,
reading = ................................................. [2]
(ii) the resistance of the thermistor.
resistance = ................................................. [2]
(b) The temperature of the thermistor increases.
State what, if anything, happens to
(i) the resistance of the thermistor,
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the ammeter reading and to the voltmeter reading.
ammeter reading: .....................................................................................................
voltmeter reading: .....................................................................................................

[1]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/O/N/12

11
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 A submarine is at rest deep beneath the surface of the sea. The gravitational field strength
is 10 N / kg, the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa and the density of sea water is
1.0 × 103 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate
(i) the pressure due to the sea water at a depth of 120 m,
pressure = ................................................. [2]
(ii) the total pressure at a depth of 120 m.
total pressure = ................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a horizontal hatch of surface area 0.45 m2 on the top of the submarine.
The hatch is at a depth of 120 m beneath the surface of the sea.
horizontal hatch of
surface area 0.45 m2
Fig. 9.1

12
(i) Calculate the downward force acting on the surface of the hatch. For
Examiner’s
Use
force = ................................................. [2]
(ii) State two reasons why the force needed to lift the hatch is different from the value
calculated in (i).
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The submarine uses ultrasound to detect obstacles.
(i) State what is meant by ultrasound.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The ultrasound is produced by a vibrating source.
Describe how the ultrasound is transmitted through the water.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]
(iii) An ultrasound pulse is emitted. At a later time, the reflected pulse is detected. The
time between the emission and the detection of the pulse is t.
1. State the other quantity that must be known in order to determine the distance
of the obstacle from the submarine.
...................................................................................................................... [1]
2. State how the distance of the obstacle from the submarine is calculated.
...................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State one other use of ultrasound.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/O/N/12

13
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a domestic heater that is used to heat a room. It contains 16 large bricks For
each of mass 7.5 kg. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 10.1
During the night, the bricks are heated from a temperature of 17 °C to 96 °C. The bricks are
made from a material that has a specific heat capacity of 2300 J / (kg °C).
(a) Calculate the thermal energy (heat) supplied to the bricks.
thermal energy = ................................................. [3]
(b) During the day, the bricks gradually cool and the stored thermal energy is released to
the room. After 7.0 hours, the bricks have cooled to 17 °C.
(i) Calculate the average rate of release of thermal energy to the room during these
7.0 hours.
rate = ................................................. [2]
(ii) At the beginning of the day, the heater releases thermal energy at a greater rate
than later in the day.
Suggest why.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

14
(c) Fig. 10.2 is a diagram of the heater standing on the floor of the room and placed next to For
one of the walls. Examiner’s
Use
wall
heater
floor
Fig. 10.2
Describe, and explain in detail, how the thermal energy is transferred throughout the
room. You may draw on Fig. 10.2.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(d) State one method of thermal insulation that is used to keep a room warm, and explain
why it is effective.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/O/N/12

15
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a thunder cloud with a flat, positively charged base. It passes over a tall For
tree growing in a region of flat, open land. Examiner’s
Use
+ + + + + + + +
(i) On Fig. 11.1, mark the charge on the tree. [1]

(ii) Explain how the tree becomes charged.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) A lightning strike occurs and, in 2.0 × 10–4 s, a charge of 560 C passes from the
cloud to the tree. The size of the charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
1. Calculate the number of electrons that pass between the tree and the cloud.
number = ................................................. [2]

16
2. Calculate the average current in the lightning strike. For

Examiner’s
Use
current = ................................................. [2]
(b) Two flat metal plates are positioned horizontally, one above the other. Fig. 11.2 shows
the positive terminal of a high-voltage supply unit connected to the bottom plate and the
negative terminal connected to the top plate.
horizontal
metal plates
high-voltage –
supply unit +
Fig. 11.2
The high-voltage supply is switched on.
(i) On Fig. 11.2, draw the shape and the direction of the electric field produced. [3]
(ii) Suggest why a small, charged oil droplet placed between the two metal plates
accelerates upwards.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]
(iii) The oil droplet touches the top metal plate. State and explain what happens to the
charge on the oil droplet.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/21/O/N/12

* 1 7 3 2 8 6 2 2 4 9 *
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B
Section A
Q9
Q10
Q11
Total
DC (RW/JG) 42473/4
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) Describe an experiment to verify the principle of moments. You may include a diagram in
your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a spanner tightening a nut.
nut
0.15 m
8.0 N
Fig. 1.1
A force of 8.0 N is applied to the spanner at a perpendicular distance of 0.15 m from the
centre of the nut.
Calculate the moment of the force acting on the nut.
moment = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/O/N/12

3
2 A pupil hangs a load of 45 N from a length of copper wire. The wire extends by 2.5 mm and For
does not exceed the limit of proportionality. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg. Calculate the mass of the 45 N load.
mass = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Use the grid in Fig. 2.1 to plot the extension-load graph for this wire for a load
between 0 and 45 N.
Fig. 2.1 [3]
(b) Use the graph plotted in Fig. 2.1 to determine the load needed to produce an extension
of 1.3 mm.
load = .................................................. [1]

4
3 A man of mass 75 kg falls from a platform high above a lake. For

Fig. 3.1a shows the man tied to the platform by a long elastic rope (bungee). Examiner’s
Fig. 3.1b shows the man when he has fallen 20 m. After this point the rope begins to stretch. Use
Fig. 3.1c shows the man at 25 m below the platform where he is first stopped by the rope.
20 m
25 m
Fig. 3.1a Fig. 3.1b Fig. 3.1c
(a) As the man falls, his gravitational potential energy changes.
(i) The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg. Calculate the change in his gravitational
potential energy as he falls through 20 m.
change in potential energy = .................................................. [2]
(ii) When he is 20 m below the platform, his kinetic energy is equal to the change in his
gravitational potential energy calculated in (i). Calculate his speed at this point.
speed = .................................................. [3]
(b) State the energy changes that take place as he falls from 20 m to 25 m below the
platform. Ignore the effect of air resistance.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/O/N/12

5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows gas trapped in a cylinder by a piston. For

Examiner’s
Use
gas
cylinder
piston
Fig. 4.1
The piston has a cross-sectional area of 0.0050 m2. It moves upwards, through a distance of
0.074 m, compressing the gas. During this compression, the average pressure of the gas is
4.6 × 105 Pa.
(a) Calculate
(i) the average force exerted on the piston by the gas during compression,
force = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the work done on the gas during compression.
work done = .................................................. [2]
(b) The gas in the cylinder has a heat capacity of 0.27 J / °C and heats up as it is compressed.
(i) Calculate the maximum possible temperature rise of the gas.
temperature rise = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Suggest a reason why the actual temperature rise of the gas is less than the value
calculated in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
6
5 (a) No thermal energy (heat) is transferred from the surface of the Sun to the Earth by For
either conduction or convection. Examiner’s
Use
Explain why this is so.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In a certain country, the climate is very sunny and hot during the day and extremely cold
during the night.
Explain how painting the houses white helps to maintain a comfortable temperature
both during the day and during the night.
during the day: .................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
during the night: ...............................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/O/N/12

7
6 The filament in a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) emits charged particles by thermionic For
emission. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) State the name of the charged particles that are emitted.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain what causes the particles to be emitted.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) State why there must be a vacuum in the c.r.o. tube.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The particles emitted have a charge of size 1.6 × 10–19 C and carry a current of
5.6 × 10–3 A between the filament and the screen of the c.r.o.
Calculate the number of particles that strike the screen every second.
number = .................................................. [2]

8
7 A small piece of metal taken from a nuclear reactor is radioactive. For

Examiner’s
(a) Describe a method to determine whether the piece of metal emits gamma-rays. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State two safety precautions that must be taken when handling the piece of metal.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/O/N/12

9
8 The nuclei of four neutral atoms are represented using nuclide notation as: For
Examiner’s
12C 14C 14N 15O Use
6 6 7 8
(a) Neutral atoms also contain electrons. State which of the four nuclei is surrounded by the
greatest number of electrons.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) From these four nuclei, state the two nuclei that have the same number of
(i) protons,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) nucleons,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) neutrons.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

10
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a diver working below the surface of a lake. The density of the water in the lake
is 1000 kg / m3, the atmospheric pressure at the surface is 1.0 × 105 Pa and the gravitational
field strength is 10 N / kg.
Fig. 9.1
The diver inflates a balloon with air at a depth of 15 m and attaches the balloon to a tray of
objects.
(a) Calculate
(i) the pressure due to 15 m of water,
pressure = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the total pressure at 15 m below the surface of the lake.
total pressure = .................................................. [1]
(b) The air in the balloon occupies a volume of 0.048 m3 at the pressure calculated in (a)(ii).
The diver releases the tray and the balloon, and they begin to rise. The temperature of
the air in the balloon does not change.
(i) Calculate the volume occupied by the air in the balloon at atmospheric pressure.
volume = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/O/N/12

11
(ii) The pressure of the air inside the balloon is less at the surface than at a depth of For
15 m. Explain, in terms of the air molecules inside the balloon, why the pressure is Examiner’s
less. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) State one difference between the arrangement of the molecules of water in the lake and
the molecules of air in the balloon.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) When the diver releases the tray, the balloon accelerates upwards and reaches a
constant speed before it arrives at the surface.
(i) Explain how the forces acting on the balloon cause it to behave in this way.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) On the axes in Fig. 9.2, sketch the distance-time graph for the balloon as it travels
15 m to the surface.
15
distance / m
0
0
time
Fig. 9.2 [3]

12
10 A laser produces red light of frequency 4.7 × 1014 Hz. The speed of light in glass is For
2.0 × 108 m / s. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Calculate the wavelength in glass of light from this laser.
wavelength = .................................................. [2]
(b) Describe an experiment to verify the law of reflection for light. You may include a diagram
in your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [5]
(c) Fig. 10.1 shows a ray of light travelling in an optical fibre. The ray strikes the side of the
fibre at P.
7°
P
Fig. 10.1
The angle between the ray and the side of the fibre is 7°.
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/O/N/12
13
(i) Determine the angle of incidence of the ray at P. For

Examiner’s
angle = .................................................. [1] Use
(ii) State and explain what happens to the ray at P.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) A room is illuminated by wall lamps. Fig. 10.2 shows a mirror on the wall behind one of
the lamps.
mirror
0.19 m
point X
wall lamp
wall
X is a point on the filament of the lamp. It is 0.19 m in front of the mirror.
(i) On Fig. 10.2, draw rays from X and locate the image of X. Label the image I. [3]
(ii) State the distance between I and the mirror.
distance = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Suggest one advantage of placing a mirror behind the lamp in the room.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

14
11 (a) A wire is wound around a soft-iron core forming a solenoid, as shown in Fig. 11.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
solenoid
12 V
battery
gap
core
variable resistor
Fig. 11.1
There is a gap in the core. The solenoid is connected in series with a 12 V battery and
a variable resistor (rheostat). The resistance of the solenoid is 0.30 Ω and the variable
resistor is set so that it has a resistance of 4.5 Ω.
(i) Calculate the current in the solenoid.
current = .................................................. [3]
(ii) The current in the solenoid magnetises the soft-iron core.
Explain how the electric circuit is used to increase the strength of the magnetic
field.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/O/N/12

15
(iii) Fig. 11.2 shows a horizontal, current-carrying wire PQ in the gap. For
Examiner’s
Use
gap
P Q
core
Fig. 11.2
1. The magnetic field in the gap is uniform and vertically upwards. The current in
PQ is from left to right. Describe the effect of the magnetic field on PQ.
............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................ [2]
2. State the effect on PQ of increasing the strength of the magnetic field in the
gap.
............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The starter motor in a car is powered by a 12 V battery that is positioned next to the
motor. The current in the motor is 75 A.
(i) Calculate the power supplied by the battery.
power = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Suggest and explain why the wires that connect the motor to the battery are very
thick.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

16
(c) A relay is used to switch on a starter motor in a car. Describe how the relay works. You For
may include a diagram in your answer. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 5054/22/O/N/12

* 6 2 9 7 0 1 6 6 9 3 *
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B

DC (CW/CGW) 59492/4
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A swimming pool is filled with 450 m3 of water at 12 °C.
The density of water is 1000 kg / m3 and its specific heat capacity is 4.2 J / (g °C).
(a) Calculate the mass of water in the swimming pool.
mass = .................................................. [2]
(b) (i) Calculate the thermal energy (heat) needed to raise the temperature of the water to
27 °C.
thermal energy = .................................................. [3]
(ii) Suggest one reason why the thermal energy supplied to the water by the heating
system, when raising the temperature of the water to 27 °C, differs from the value
calculated in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/O/N/13

3
2 A girl of weight 550 N is playing on a see-saw with her brother. Fig. 2.1 shows her brother of For
weight W sitting 1.1 m to the right of the balance point. Examiner’s
Use
girl balance brother

point
1.1 m
0.86 m
550 N W
The see-saw is balanced when the girl sits 0.86 m to the left of the balance point.
(a) Calculate W.
W = .................................................. [2]
(b) The girl and her brother slide equal distances along the see-saw away from each other.
Describe and explain what happens.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

4
3 A schoolboy tries to inflate a bicycle tyre using a bicycle pump. For

Examiner’s
(a) Explain how the air molecules inside the pump produce a pressure. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The opening at the end of the pump is blocked with a small amount of dried earth, as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
air
dried earth pump
Fig. 3.1
The air is initially at a pressure of 100 kPa. During one stroke of the pump, the volume of
air in the pump is reduced from 120 cm3 to 16 cm3.
(i) Assuming that the temperature of the air remains constant, calculate the pressure
of the compressed air.
pressure = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Compressed air in the pump at this pressure exerts a force on the dried earth. The
cross-sectional area of the opening at the end of the pump is 1.2 × 10–5 m2.
Calculate the size of this force.
force = .................................................. [2]
(iii) In fact, the temperature of the air in the pump increases as its volume decreases.
The actual pressure of the 16 cm3 of air differs from the pressure calculated in (i).
Using ideas about molecules, state and explain this difference.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/O/N/13
5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows food being cooked in an electric grill. For

Examiner’s
Use
red-hot heating elements
Fig. 4.1
There are red-hot heating elements above the food and thermal energy (heat) is transmitted
to the food by radiation.
(a) Explain what is meant, in this case, by radiation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why very little thermal energy is transmitted to the food by
(i) conduction,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) convection.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

6
5 (a) Draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of a liquid-in-glass clinical thermometer. For
Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(b) A clinical thermometer is used to measure the temperature of a patient. When removed,
the thermometer cools but it continues to show the maximum temperature reached.
Explain how this happens.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/O/N/13

7
6 (a) Suggest a material that is used to make a permanent magnet. For

Examiner’s
...................................................................................................................................... [1] Use
(b) When there are no other magnetic fields present, the needle of a plotting compass
points due north in the Earth’s magnetic field. This is shown in Fig. 6.1.
needle
north
plotting
compass
Fig. 6.1
The plotting compass is placed close to a permanent magnet, first at position A and
then at position B, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
N
B
Fig. 6.2
The magnetic field close to the permanent magnet is very much larger than the magnetic
field of the Earth.
On Fig. 6.2, draw needles in the two circles to show the direction in which the compass
needle points when the compass is at A and at B. [2]
(c) Describe an electrical method that is used to demagnetise a permanent magnet. You
may include a diagram in your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
8
7 A 9.6 kW electric shower is powered by a 240 V mains supply. For

Examiner’s
(a) (i) Calculate the electric current in the heating element of the shower. Use
current = .................................................. [3]
(ii) Suggest an appropriate rating for the circuit breaker in the circuit for the shower.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A family uses the shower for a total time of 25 minutes every day. The cost of 1 kW h of
electrical energy is 21 cents.
Calculate the daily cost of using the shower.
cost = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/O/N/13

9
8 A radioactive sample emits only beta-particles and gamma-rays. For

Examiner’s
(a) Describe, with the aid of a labelled diagram, an experiment that shows that the sample Use
does not emit alpha-particles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State two safety precautions that must be taken when working with the radioactive
sample.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]

10
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a skydiver, of mass 70 kg, falling towards the Earth at constant speed, a long
time after jumping from an aeroplane.
Fig. 9.1
At time t = 0, he receives a radio signal. He opens his parachute 12 s later. Fig. 9.2 is the
speed-time graph for the skydiver.
60
speed
m/s
40
20
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
time / s
Fig. 9.2
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
(i) Calculate the weight of the skydiver.
weight = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/O/N/13

11
(ii) State the size of the air resistance acting on the skydiver between t = 0 and t = 12 s. For
Examiner’s
air resistance = .................................................. [1] Use
(c) For the period between t = 0 and t = 12 s, determine
(i) the speed of the skydiver,
speed = .................................................. [1]
(ii) the distance fallen by the skydiver,
distance = .................................................. [2]
(iii) the change in the gravitational potential energy of the skydiver.
change in energy = .................................................. [2]
(d) As he falls at constant speed, his gravitational potential energy changes into another
form. State the name of this other form of energy.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) (i) State and explain what happens to the air resistance as the skydiver opens his
parachute.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) State and explain the effect on the motion of the skydiver of opening the parachute.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(f) By t = 15 s, his parachute is fully open.
State and explain what happens to the air resistance after t = 15 s.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
12
10 A student goes for a walk in the mountains. During a storm, she sees lightning strike a For
hillside in the distance. Several seconds later, she hears the thunder caused by the lightning. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Explain why she hears the thunder several seconds after she sees the lightning.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The student knows the distance to the hillside. She waits for lightning to strike the
hillside again. Describe how she can determine a value for the speed of sound in
air.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) After the storm, the student sees a rainbow.
(i) State the speed of light in air.
speed = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Calculate the wavelength in air of light of frequency 7.5 × 1014 Hz.
wavelength = .................................................. [2]
(iii) State the colours of the spectrum in order of increasing wavelength.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/O/N/13

13
(c) In the laboratory, the student sends blue light into a glass prism placed on a sheet of For
paper. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 10.1. Examiner’s
Use
45°
blue light
Fig. 10.1
The blue light enters the prism with an angle of incidence of 45°.
(i) On Fig. 10.1, mark the angle of refraction in the glass and label it r. [1]
(ii) The student wishes to determine the angle of refraction. On the sheet of paper, she
draws the path the ray takes in the glass. Describe how she could do this.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) 1. State the formula that relates the angle of incidence i, the angle of refraction r
and the refractive index n.
...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
2. The angle of refraction in the glass is 28°.
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = .................................................. [1]
(iv) The student sends a ray of red light to the glass prism along the same path as the
blue light.
On Fig. 10.1, mark the path taken by the red light after it enters the prism. [2]

14
11 An ammeter, a variable resistor and a 4.0 Ω resistor are connected in series with a 6.0 V For
battery. A cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) is connected in parallel with the 4.0 Ω resistor Examiner’s
through a switch. Fig. 11.1 is the circuit diagram. Use
6.0 V switch
4.0 c.r.o.
Fig. 11.1
The switch is open.
(a) The variable resistor is adjusted so that it has a resistance of 8.0 Ω.
Calculate
(i) the current measured by the ammeter,
current = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0 Ω resistor.
p.d. = .................................................. [1]
(b) The resistance of the variable resistor is adjusted until the p.d. across the 4.0 Ω resistor
is 5.0 V.
State the effect that this adjustment has on
(i) the current measured by the ammeter,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the resistance of the variable resistor.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/O/N/13

15
(c) The trace on the c.r.o. is a horizontal line across the middle of the screen and the p.d. For
across the 4.0 Ω resistor is still 5.0 V. Examiner’s
Use
The Y-gain control is set at 2.0 V / cm and the switch is closed.
State the effect on the trace of closing the switch.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Fig. 11.2 shows, in outline, the basic structure of a c.r.o. viewed from the side.
ILODPHQW
HOHFWURQEHDP
Fig. 11.2
(i) On Fig. 11.2 write, in the five empty boxes, the names of the parts of the c.r.o.
indicated. [3]
(ii) Explain how the electron beam is produced.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) Explain why the tube of the c.r.o. must be evacuated.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
Question 11 continues on page 16.

16
(iv) In the c.r.o. shown in Fig. 11.2, the electrons travel from left to right. For
Examiner’s
1. Explain why the flow of electrons is an electric current. Use
...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
2. State the direction of the conventional current due to the electrons.
...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/21/O/N/13

* 0 6 1 2 5 1 0 3 2 8 *
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B

DC (LEG/SW) 64486/5
2
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A set of traffic lights hangs from the end of a metal cable. A horizontal chain pulls the traffic
lights to the right so that they are above the middle of the road. Fig. 1.1 shows the metal
cable inclined to the vertical.
metal cable
horizontal chain
traffic lights
Fig. 1.1
The weight of the traffic lights is 240 N.
(a) Two of the forces on the traffic lights are the tension in the horizontal chain and the
weight of the traffic lights.
On Fig. 1.1, mark
(i) an arrow that represents the tension in the horizontal chain, [1]
(ii) an arrow that represents the weight of the traffic lights. [1]
(b) The tension in the horizontal chain is 140 N. Use a scale diagram to determine the size
of the resultant of the weight and the tension in the chain. State the scale used for the
diagram.
scale = ......................................................
resultant force = ......................................................

[3]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/O/N/13
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a boy moving a water container in a wheelbarrow. For

Examiner’s
Use
water container
Fig. 2.1
The container has a volume of 0.15 m3 and is filled with water of density 1000 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate the mass of water in the container when it is full.
mass = .................................................. [2]
(b) It is harder to stop the wheelbarrow when the container is full than when it is empty.
Explain this.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

4
3 A farmer uses a hydraulic system to operate machinery that is pulled behind a tractor. For
Examiner’s
Two cylinders and the flexible pipe that joins them contain oil. Two pistons keep the oil in the Use
cylinders. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 3.1.
flexible pipe
larger
oil piston
smaller piston
smaller cylinder larger cylinder
Fig. 3.1
The cross-sectional area of the smaller cylinder is 0.048 m2.

The cross-sectional area of the larger cylinder is 0.14 m2.
The smaller piston exerts a force of 12 000 N on the oil.
(a) Calculate
(i) the pressure in the oil,
pressure = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the force exerted by the oil on the larger piston.
force = .................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest why the resultant force on the larger piston is less than the value obtained in
(a)(ii).
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The smaller piston moves a distance of 0.065 m into the cylinder.
Calculate the work done on the oil by the smaller piston.
work done = .................................................. [2]
(d) Suggest one advantage of using oil rather than air in the system.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/O/N/13
5
4 A large test-tube contains wax above its melting point. It is placed in a cool room. For
Examiner’s
Fig. 4.1 shows how the temperature T of the wax changes in a time of 30 minutes. Use
80
70
T / °C
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
time / minutes
Fig. 4.1
(a) Determine the melting point of the wax.
melting point = .................................................. [1]
(b) The test-tube contains 110 g of wax that has a specific latent heat of fusion of 210 J / g.
Calculate the thermal energy transferred from the wax between 3 and 16 minutes.
energy = .................................................. [2]
(c) (i) State what happens to the wax between 3 and 16 minutes.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Between 3 and 16 minutes, the temperature of the wax is above room temperature
and energy is lost to the room.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why the temperature of the wax remains constant.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
6
5 A physics textbook states that sound is a longitudinal pressure wave with a frequency within For
the audible range. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Explain what is meant by a longitudinal wave.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) State the approximate range of audible frequencies.
highest frequency: ......................................................
lowest frequency: ......................................................

[2]
(ii) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s. Using your answer in (i), calculate the shortest
wavelength in air of sound in the audible range.
wavelength = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/O/N/13

7
6 At an airport, fuel is pumped through a pipe from a tanker to an aeroplane, as shown in For
Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
tanker
aeroplane
pipe
Fig. 6.1
As it rubs against the pipe, the fuel becomes negatively charged and this charges the
aeroplane.
(a) Explain, in terms of the particles involved, how the fuel becomes negatively charged.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Suggest and explain one problem that can arise when an aeroplane becomes charged.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) To prevent an aeroplane becoming charged, a metal cable connects the aeroplane to
the ground.
Explain
(i) why the cable is made of metal,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) how the cable prevents the aeroplane becoming charged.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

8
7 An electric saw is rated at 1200 W. When working on a job that lasts for four days, a workman For
uses the saw, on average, for 75 minutes each day. The cost of 1 kW h of electrical energy is Examiner’s
21 cents. Use
(a) Calculate the cost of using the saw for this job.
cost = .................................................. [3]
(b) The metal case of the electric saw is earthed.
Explain how this protects the workman.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/O/N/13

9
8 A smoke detector containing an alpha-particle source is fixed to the ceiling in a room. The For
alpha-particles ionise the air between two metal plates so that a battery produces a current Examiner’s
between the plates. Use
If smoke enters the detector, it reduces the current between the plates and an alarm sounds.
Fig. 8.1 shows the arrangement.
ceiling
alpha-particle source
ionised air to alarm

circuit
metal plates
Fig. 8.1
(a) A technician removes the source from the smoke detector and measures the count rate
of the source.
(i) Suggest two precautions that the technician should take when working with the
source.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The technician measures the count rate, in counts / s, five times. On each occasion,
the arrangement of the equipment is the same.
The values obtained are: 81 77 80 83 and 79.
Suggest why the values are different.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Radioactive sources that emit beta-particles or gamma-rays are not used in smoke
detectors. State and explain two reasons for this.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. . .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]

10
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) State what is meant by the moment of a force.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The anchor of a sailing ship has a mass of 350 kg. Six sailors raise the anchor from
the sea-bed by turning a large axle. They push the handles attached to the axle and it
rotates. The anchor is on the end of a chain that winds on to the rotating axle.
Fig. 9.1 shows the sailors lifting the anchor.
axis of rotation
1.2 m
handle
axle
to anchor
chain
Fig. 9.1
Each of the sailors exerts a force of 750 N on his handle at a distance of 1.2 m from
the axis of rotation. The axle rotates through one complete revolution and the anchor is
lifted through a distance of 160 cm.
(i) Calculate
1. the total moment exerted on the axle by the six sailors,
moment = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/O/N/13

11
2. the gravitational potential energy gained by the anchor as the axle rotates For
through one complete revolution. Examiner’s
Use
energy = .................................................. [3]
(ii) The work done on the axle by the sailors is very much larger than the gravitational
potential energy gained by the anchor.
State and explain how energy is wasted.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) Explain why the power produced by the sailors is larger when the anchor is lifted at
a faster rate.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Describe, with the aid of a labelled diagram, how to verify the principle of moments.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]

12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows an electric train of mass 5.5 × 105 kg. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 10.1
The train is initially at rest. The electric motor exerts a constant force and the train accelerates.
Its acceleration decreases until the train reaches a speed of 40 m / s.
The train then continues at this constant speed.
(a) (i) On the axes in Fig. 10.2, sketch a speed-time graph for the train.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 10.2
[3]
(ii) Describe how the speed-time graph for the train is used to determine the distance
travelled by the train when it is accelerating.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/O/N/13

13
(b) Explain, in terms of the forces acting, For

Examiner’s
(i) why the acceleration of the train decreases, Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) why the train eventually reaches constant speed.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) (i) Calculate the kinetic energy of the train when it is travelling at a speed of 40 m / s.
kinetic energy = .................................................. [3]
(ii) As the train accelerates to 40 m / s, electrical energy supplied to the motor is

converted into kinetic energy of the train. The efficiency of this process is 0.40
(40 %).
Calculate the electrical energy supplied to the motor.
energy = .................................................. [2]
(iii) The electrical energy is generated in an oil-fired power station. Chemical energy in
oil is converted into the electrical energy supplied to the motor.
Suggest two places where energy is lost as heat in this process.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]

14
11 A metal filament lamp is connected to a power supply. The electromotive force (e.m.f.) For
produced by the supply can be varied. Fig. 11.1 is the circuit diagram. Examiner’s
Use
variable + metal
power filament
supply – lamp
Fig. 11.1
(a) State what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Add appropriate circuit symbols to Fig. 11.1 to show the position of
(i) an ammeter that measures the current in the circuit, [1]
(ii) a voltmeter that measures the voltage across the lamp. [1]
(c) A student adds meters to the circuit and makes measurements of the current and
voltage. He then plots the current/voltage graph shown in Fig. 11.2.
2.0
1.5
current / A
1.0
0.5
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
voltage / V
Fig. 11.2
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/O/N/13

15
(i) Using values from Fig. 11.2, calculate the resistance of the lamp when the current For
is 0.70 A. Give your answer to an appropriate number of significant figures. Examiner’s
Use
resistance = .................................................. [3]
(ii) State what, if anything, happens to the resistance of the lamp as the voltage
increases.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) In normal use, the lamp is connected to a 12 V supply.
Use Fig. 11.2 to determine the power of the lamp when it is used in this way.
power = .................................................. [2]
(e) When connected to a 12 V supply, thermionic emission occurs in the lamp.
(i) Describe what is meant by thermionic emission.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Thermionic emission is used in a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) tube.
1. State why air must be removed from the tube of the c.r.o.
...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [1]
2. A voltage is connected across the Y-plates in the c.r.o.
State and explain the effect on the trace on the screen.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/O/N/13

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 5054/22/O/N/13

* 4 5 2 8 6 4 4 9 3 3 *
PHYSICS 5054/21
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B

DC (CW/SW) 82958/4
2
Section A
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a motorcycle during a race.
Fig. 1.1
The motorcycle accelerates along a straight section of the track from a speed of 40 m / s to
maximum speed.
Fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for the motorcycle along the straight section of the track.
90
80
70
speed 60
m/s
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
time / s
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

3
The mass of the motorcycle is 180 kg.
(a) For the time 0 to 2.0 s, determine
(i) the acceleration of the motorcycle,
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the motorcycle.
force = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The driving force acting on the motorcycle remains constant throughout the 12 s spent on the
straight section of track.
(i) Using Fig. 1.2, describe how the acceleration of the motorcycle changes during this time.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of the forces acting, why the acceleration changes in this way.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]

4
2 A student places a metre rule on the edge of a triangular prism. The prism is used as a pivot and
the rule balances about the 50 cm mark.
The student then places a block of wood at the 10 cm mark on the rule and an empty measuring
cylinder at the 80 cm mark. The rule is still balanced. Fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement.
measuring
cylinder
block of
wood
50 cm mark metre rule

pivot
10 cm mark 80 cm mark
The student now places a weight of 0.39 N on top of the block of wood. She then starts to pour oil
into the measuring cylinder. The rule balances again when there is 60 cm3 of oil in the measuring
cylinder.
(a) Calculate
(i) the weight of the oil in the cylinder,
weight = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the mass of the oil in the cylinder.
mass = ...........................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the density of the oil.
density = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

5
3 Before a small, inflatable boat is used, air is pumped into its rubber chamber.
Fig. 3.1 shows a man using an air pump to inflate the boat.
Fig. 3.1
Before the man starts to use the pump, the air in the vertical cylinder of the pump is at atmospheric
pressure.
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how the air inside the cylinder exerts a pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) When the boat is fully inflated, a valve is closed trapping the air in the rubber chamber. The air
pump is disconnected.
The man sits on the side of the boat. The volume of the rubber chamber decreases and
the pressure of the air in the rubber chamber increases. The temperature of the air stays
constant.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

6
4 Ripple tanks are often used to illustrate wave motion.
(a) Describe what is meant by wave motion in a ripple tank.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) When describing wave motion, state what is meant by
(i) frequency,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) wavelength.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A water wave in a ripple tank strikes a barrier. Fig. 4.1 shows some wavefronts of the incident
wave.
direction of
travel of
incident wave
wavefronts
barrier
Fig. 4.1
The water wave hits the barrier and is reflected. Three of the wavefronts in Fig. 4.1 have
already hit the barrier. The reflected parts of these wavefronts are not shown.
On Fig. 4.1, draw the reflected parts of these three wavefronts. [3]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

7
5 The device shown in Fig. 5.1 uses the reflection of ultrasound to measure distances.
ultrasound wave
Fig. 5.1
(a) State what is meant by ultrasound.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a builder using the ultrasound device to measure the width of a room.
ultrasound wave
Fig. 5.2
The ultrasound device is placed against one wall and it emits an ultrasound wave that reflects
back from the opposite wall.
The time between sending out the ultrasound wave and receiving the reflection is 0.030 s. The
speed of ultrasound in air is 340 m / s.
Calculate the distance between the device and the opposite wall.
distance = ...........................................................[2]

8
6 The base of a storm cloud is negatively charged. Fig. 6.1 shows the cloud above flat ground.
cloud
– – – – – – – –
+ + + + + + + + ground
Fig. 6.1
(a) The cloud causes the ground beneath it to become positively charged.
Explain, in terms of the particles involved, how the ground becomes positively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In the space between the negative charge on the cloud and the positive charge on the ground,
there is an electric field.
State what is meant by an electric field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A lightning strike takes place. In 0.0015 s, a charge of 180 C passes between the cloud and
the ground.
Calculate the average current in the lightning strike.
current = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

9
7 A straight length of copper wire lies horizontally between the poles of a U-shaped magnet. Fig. 7.1
shows the two ends of the wire connected to a very sensitive, centre-zero ammeter.
copper wire
N S
sensitive, centre-zero ammeter
Fig. 7.1
The copper wire is moved upwards slowly between the two magnetic poles. The needle on the
ammeter deflects to the right.
(a) Explain why the needle on the ammeter deflects.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The wire is moved downwards very quickly between the two magnetic poles.
State what happens to the needle on the ammeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State what happens to the needle on the ammeter when the copper wire is moved horizontally
between the two poles.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

11
12
8 The nuclide notation for the radioactive isotope boron-12 is 5 B.
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram to illustrate the structure of a neutral atom of this
isotope. Show all the particles in the atom.
[4]
(b) As boron-12 decays, it emits a beta-particle. A new atom is produced.
Determine
(i) the proton number (atomic number) of the new atom,
proton number = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the nucleon number (mass number) of the new atom.
nucleon number = ...........................................................[1]

12
Section B
9 Fig. 9.1 shows the dam and reservoir of a hydroelectric power station.
Fig. 9.1
A hydroelectric power station uses a renewable energy source.
(a) State two other renewable energy sources.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) When the power station operates at full capacity, the electrical power output is 6.8 × 109 W.
(i) 1. Calculate the electrical energy output of the power station if it operates at full
capacity for one year.
energy = ...........................................................[1]
2. Suggest why, in practice, the power station does not operate at full capacity
throughout the year.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

13
(ii) The water surface in the reservoir that supplies the hydroelectric power station is at a
vertical height of 170 m above the turbines. In one hour, 1.6 × 1010 kg of water flows from
the reservoir through the turbines. The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
1. Calculate the gravitational potential energy that is converted into other forms of
energy in one hour.
energy = ...........................................................[2]
2. Calculate the efficiency of the power station when operating at full capacity.
efficiency = ...........................................................[2]
3. Suggest two reasons why the efficiency of the power station is less than 1.0 (100%).
1. ................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Before the electrical energy is transmitted along power lines, the voltage is increased to a
very large value.
(i) State and explain why a very high voltage is used to transmit electrical energy over long
distances.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) State the name of the device that is used to increase the voltage.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Explain why the generators in the power station must be a.c. (alternating current)
generators.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

14
10 The casing of an electric kettle is made of white plastic. Fig. 10.1 shows the heating element
positioned in the base of the kettle.
water
heating element
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) The heating element supplies thermal energy to the water at the bottom of the kettle.
Describe and explain how the thermal energy is transferred throughout the water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain why a kettle with its heating element in the water at the top of the kettle does not
heat the water uniformly.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The kettle is powered by a 230 V supply. It is switched on for 3.5 minutes and there is a current
of 9.6 A in the heating element.
(i) Calculate the thermal energy produced in the heating element in this time.
thermal energy = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

15
(ii) The kettle contains 1.6 kg of water that was at an initial temperature of 22 °C.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the maximum possible temperature of the water.
temperature = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) Suggest one reason why the temperature of the water, after 3.5 minutes, is less than the
value calculated in (b)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Explain one advantage of
(i) using plastic for the casing of a kettle,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) choosing white as the colour for the outside of the casing.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The kettle is switched on again and the water reaches its boiling point. It starts to boil and the
kettle remains switched on.
(i) State the meaning of boiling point.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of molecules, what happens to the thermal energy that is supplied
when the water is boiling.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

16
11 A student makes a 2.0 V battery by connecting two cells of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 2.0 V in
parallel. The battery, an ammeter with different ranges and three different resistors are used to set
up the circuit shown in Fig. 11.1.
2.0 V
2.0 V 3.0 1
A
2.0 1
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) Explain what is meant by electromotive force.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State one advantage of using two cells in parallel rather than using a single 2.0 V cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Resistor X and the 3.0 Ω resistor have a combined resistance that is equal to 2.0 Ω.
Calculate
(i) the total resistance of the circuit,
total resistance = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the resistance of X.
resistance of X = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

17
(c) (i) Determine the reading of the ammeter.
reading = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Suggest a suitable range for the ammeter.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The current in the 2.0 Ω resistor is I2.

The current in the 3.0 Ω resistor is I3.
The current in X is IX.
State the equation that relates I2, I3 and IX.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) State the potential difference (p.d.) across
(i) the 2.0 Ω resistor,
p.d. = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the 3.0 Ω resistor.
p.d. = ...........................................................[1]
Question 11 continues on page 18.

18
(f) The student sets up a second circuit using a variable d.c. power supply, an ammeter and a
12 V metal filament lamp. The circuit is shown in Fig. 11. 2.
d.c. power supply

+ –
metal filament lamp
Fig. 11.2
The d.c. power supply is set to 12 V and the ammeter reading is 1.5 A.
The student changes the e.m.f. of the d.c. power supply to 6.0 V. The lamp dims and the
ammeter reading changes.
(i) State and explain what happens to the resistance of the metal filament of the lamp.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State whether the new ammeter reading is less than, equal to or greater than 0.75 A.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 5054/21/O/N/14

* 3 9 2 0 4 9 3 3 6 4 *
PHYSICS 5054/22
1 hour 45 minutes
Section A
Section B

DC (CW/JG) 82959/3
2
Section A
1 A student suspends a spring from a clamp stand. He measures the unstretched length of the
spring with no load attached. He then attaches different loads to the lower end of the spring and
measures the new lengths of the spring.
Fig. 1.1 shows how the total length of the spring depends on the load attached.
25
20
length / cm
P
15
10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
load / N
Fig. 1.1
(a) At point P on Fig. 1.1, the line stops being straight and begins to curve.
State the name of point P.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Using Fig. 1.1, determine the unstretched length of the spring.
unstretched length = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the extension of the spring for a load of 4.0 N.
extension = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/O/N/14
3
(c) The student attaches a small block of wood to an identical spring. The extension of the spring
is 2.7 cm. The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
Calculate the mass of the block of wood.
mass = ...........................................................[2]

4
2 In hospitals, doctors and nurses operate taps with their elbows in order to avoid contamination.
Fig. 2.1 shows a hospital tap with a long handle.
0.18 m
handle
X
Fig. 2.1
(a) A nurse applies a force of 2.5 N at a point X on the handle, 0.18 m from the axis of the tap.
(i) Calculate the maximum moment about the axis that this force can produce.
moment = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The moment produced by the nurse is less than this maximum value.
Suggest one reason why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State how the force needed to operate the tap is affected by the length of the handle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/O/N/14

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a helium cylinder being used at a funfair to inflate balloons that float in the air.
Fig. 3.1
Initially, all the helium is stored in the cylinder at a pressure of 2.0 × 107 Pa.
When no more balloons can be filled, all the helium occupies a total volume of 1.8 m3 and is at a
pressure of 1.0 × 105 Pa. The temperature of the helium has not changed.
(a) Calculate, stating the formula used, the initial volume of the helium in the cylinder.
volume = ...........................................................[3]
(b) The balloon seller takes the cylinder back to the helium supplier and it is refilled. The mass of
helium in the cylinder is 0.30 kg.
(i) Calculate the density of helium in the cylinder.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the empty cylinder is 16 kg.
Suggest why weighing the cylinder is not an accurate method of determining the amount
of helium supplied.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a black car going up a hill on a bright, sunny day.
Fig. 4.1
(a) State
(i) one way in which the car is gaining thermal energy,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) one way in which the car is losing thermal energy.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The car accelerates up the hill. In addition to the changes in the thermal energy of the car,
there are other energy changes taking place.
Describe the other energy changes occurring as the car moves.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/O/N/14

7
5 A test-tube contains solid wax. The melting point of the wax is 58 °C.
The test-tube is partially immersed in a beaker of boiling water and the wax melts. A thermometer
is placed in the liquid wax.
At time t = 0, the thermometer reads 90 °C and the test-tube is immediately removed from the
water. The test-tube then cools to room temperature of 23 °C.
(a) The temperature of the wax changes as it cools to room temperature.
On the axes of Fig. 5.1, sketch a graph to show how the temperature changes with time t.
Mark on the temperature axis 90 °C, 58 °C and 23 °C. [3]
temperature / °C
0
0
t
Fig. 5.1
(b) On the completed graph of Fig. 5.1, mark a point H, where half of the wax is solid and half is
liquid. [1]
(c) The specific latent heat of fusion of the wax is 220 J / g and the mass of the wax is 45 g.
Calculate the thermal energy released by the wax as it solidifies.
thermal energy = ...........................................................[2]

8
6 (a) State what happens to the molecules of a gas as its temperature increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows a runner in a long distance race. He tips water over himself to keep cool.
Fig. 6.1
(i) Explain, in terms of molecules, how the evaporation of water keeps the runner cool.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) At one point in the race, a strong breeze blows past the runner and the water evaporates
more quickly.
Suggest one reason why the water evaporates more quickly in the breeze.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/O/N/14

9
7 The circuit of Fig. 7.1 includes an ammeter, a 6.0 Ω resistor, a length of metal resistance wire and
three 1.5 V cells connected in parallel.
1.5 V
1.5 V
P Q
1.5 V
6.0 1
metal
resistance wire
Fig. 7.1
(a) State
(i) one advantage of using cells in parallel rather than using a single cell,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the potential difference (p.d.) between points P and Q in the circuit of Fig. 7.1.
p.d. = ...........................................................[1]
(b) (i) The ammeter in Fig. 7.1 reads 0.075 A.
Calculate the resistance of the resistance wire.
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) The temperature of the metal resistance wire increases.
State and explain the effect of this temperature increase on the ammeter reading.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
10
8 Fig. 8.1 shows the structure of a simple alternating current (a.c.) generator.
output
terminals
Fig. 8.1
(a) On Fig. 8.1, label
• the coil of the generator with the letter C,

• a slip ring with the letter S,
• a carbon brush with the letter B.
[2]
(b) The a.c. generator is operating and the arrows on Fig. 8.1 show the direction of rotation.
Explain why there is an electromotive force (e.m.f.) between the two output terminals.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/O/N/14

11
(c) The output terminals of the a.c. generator are connected to a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
Fig. 8.2 shows the trace on the screen of the c.r.o.
Fig. 8.2
Describe how the trace and a setting on the c.r.o. are used to find the time for one revolution
of the coil of the a.c. generator. You may draw on Fig. 8.2 if you wish.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

12
Section B
9 (a) Explain what is meant by uniform acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Acceleration is a vector quantity.
State how a vector quantity differs from a scalar quantity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A rock from space is travelling in a straight line at high speed when it enters the Earth’s
atmosphere. Fig. 9.1 is the speed-time graph for the rock from time t = 0 to time t = 50 s.
14 000
12 000
10 000
speed
m/s
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
t /s
Fig. 9.1
(i) On Fig. 9.1, mark
• a letter X, where the rock is moving with a constant speed,

• a letter Y, where the rock has a uniform deceleration,
• a letter Z, where the rock has a non-uniform deceleration.
[3]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/O/N/14

13
(ii) At time t = 25 s, the mass of the rock is 8.4 kg. For the time t = 25 s, determine
1. the size of the acceleration of the rock,
acceleration = ...........................................................[3]
2. the size of the resultant force on the rock.
force = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) Fig. 9.2 shows the rock at t = 25 s.
direction of travel
rock
surface of the Earth
1. On Fig. 9.2, draw and label two arrows to show the directions of the gravitational
force F and the air resistance R acting on the rock. [2]
2. Suggest why the size of the air resistance changes as the rock travels through the
Earth’s atmosphere.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Suggest what happens to the rock at t = 40 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

14
10 (a) State the speed of light in air.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a ray of blue light passing from air into a glass block and refracting at the
surface.
blue light
glass block
(i) As the light enters the glass, state what happens to
1. the speed of the light,
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. the frequency of the light,
................................................................................................................................[1]
3. the wavelength of the light.
................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, mark and label the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r. [2]
(c) The refractive index of glass for blue light is 1.5.
(i) A ray of blue light strikes the surface of a glass block at an angle of incidence of 89°.
Calculate the angle of refraction of the light in the block.
angle of refraction = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) Explain why the angle of refraction of blue light in glass is always less than 45°.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/O/N/14
15
(d) Blue light, travelling in air, strikes the side of a different glass block and continues in the same
direction as it enters the glass block. Fig. 10.2 shows the ray of light and the shape of the
glass block. The critical angle for this glass is 42°.
blue
light
45°
Fig. 10.2
(i) Explain why the light continues in the same direction as it enters the glass block.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) On Fig. 10.2, complete the path of the light until it leaves the glass. [2]
11 Strontium-90 (90
38
Sr) is a radioactive isotope. A nucleus of strontium-90 decays by the emission of a
beta-particle (β).
(a) Define the term isotope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) For a neutral atom of strontium-90, state
(i) the number of electrons,
number of electrons = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the number of neutrons.
number of neutrons = ...........................................................[1]
(c) When a nucleus of strontium-90 decays, it becomes a nucleus of yttrium (symbol Y).
Complete the equation for this decay.
....... .......
90
Sr ....... Y + ....... β [2]
38

16
(d) A sample initially contains 6.0 × 108 atoms of strontium-90.
(i) The half-life of strontium-90 is 29 years.
Calculate the number of strontium-90 atoms that remain in the sample after 87 years.
number of atoms = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Describe an experiment that shows that the sample emits only beta-particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(iii) A teacher says that the emission of beta-particles from strontium-90 is random.
1. Explain what is meant by random in this context.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. State two ways in which the emission of beta-particles from strontium-90 is random.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 5054/22/O/N/14

Physics Past Paper - P2 - 2004-14 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Physics Past Paper - P2 - 2004-14 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics Past Paper - P2 - 2004-14 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Centre Number Candidate Number Name

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

For Examiner’s Use

Stick your personal label here, if Q11

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

Answer all the questions in this section.

Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2

(ii) Explain why the acceleration decreases from A to B.

(iii) Explain why the parachutist falls at a constant speed after B.

© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04 [Turn over

(a) Explain in detail why the gaps are needed.

© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s.

(a) Explain what is meant by speed.

(b) Calculate the time between claps.

time = …………………….. [3]

(c) Calculate the number of claps in 1 minute.

number of claps = ……………….. [2]

© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04 [Turn over

(a) (i) Explain why the tape becomes magnetized.

(ii) State the name of a permanent magnetic material.

© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

The potential difference across the 12 Ω resistor is 4.0 V.

(a) Explain why

(i) using the voltmeter on the range 0 to 3.0 V is unsuitable,

(ii) using the voltmeter on the range 0 to 30 V is unsuitable.

(ii) Calculate the p.d. between A and B in Fig. 6.1.

(a) Explain why

(i) electrons are emitted from the filament,

(ii) electrons accelerate after they leave the filament,

(iii) a vacuum is needed in the tube.

© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

power stations and weapons testing

(b) State one effect of background radiation.

(c) Where do cosmic rays come from?

(d) The nucleon number (mass number) of 220

(e) Radon (286

proton number ……………………..

nucleon number ….………………….

© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04 [Turn over

Answer two questions from this section.

Use the separate answer paper provided.

© UCLES 2004 5054/02 M/J/04

10 Fig. 10.1 is a full-scale drawing of a small aluminium bar.

(i) describe the readings to be taken,

(b) The bar is placed in a small furnace.

The mass of the carriage and children is 500 kg.

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

For Examiner’s Use

Stick your personal label here, if Q11

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

Answer all the questions in this section.

(b) Information about Earth and Venus is given in the table.

planet time for one orbit radius of orbit circumference of

Earth 1.0 150 942